Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/NEWS @ 28149:fd72698178e7
*** empty log message ***
author | Dave Love <fx@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Tue, 14 Mar 2000 23:01:20 +0000 |
parents | 343d3197bdea |
children | 20862b49300f |
rev | line source |
---|---|
27200 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000 |
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
25853 | 3 See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | |
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
7 | |
8 | |
25995 | 9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
10 | |
27994 | 11 ** There are two new resources for colormap handling under X. |
12 | |
28140 | 13 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
14 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
15 is useful for debugging X problems. | |
16 | |
17 Example: | |
18 | |
19 emacs.synchronous: true | |
20 | |
27994 | 21 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
22 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
27995 | 23 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
24 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
25 visual class names are | |
27994 | 26 |
27 TrueColor | |
28 PseudoColor | |
29 DirectColor | |
30 StaticColor | |
31 GrayScale | |
32 StaticGray | |
33 | |
34 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
35 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
36 meaning. | |
37 | |
27995 | 38 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
39 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
40 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
41 visual. | |
42 | |
43 Example: | |
44 | |
45 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 | |
27994 | 46 |
47 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
48 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
49 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
50 resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
51 | |
27995 | 52 Example: |
53 | |
54 emacs.privateColormap: true | |
55 | |
25995 | 56 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
57 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
58 |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
59 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
60 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them. |
25995 | 61 |
25853 | 62 * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
63 | |
27966
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
64 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
65 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
66 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
67 |
27847 | 68 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to |
27845 | 69 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is |
27847 | 70 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can |
71 be customized. | |
27845 | 72 |
27770 | 73 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
74 | |
27473 | 75 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
76 all frames except the selected one. | |
77 | |
27369 | 78 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
79 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
80 | |
27356 | 81 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
82 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo | |
83 area or with tooltips. | |
84 | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
85 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
86 read mail from the menu etc. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
87 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
88 ** Changes in Outline mode. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
89 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
90 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
91 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
92 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
93 |
27200 | 94 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
95 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
96 | |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
97 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
98 or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
99 several other special buffers. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
100 |
26432
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
101 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
102 under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
103 .emacs file. |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
104 |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
105 The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount' |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
106 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
107 |
26417 | 108 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
109 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
110 `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
111 | |
26322
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
112 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
113 is running in batch mode. For example, |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
114 |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
115 (message "%s" (read t)) |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
116 |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
117 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
118 to standard output. |
9d7f261d1841
Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26306
diff
changeset
|
119 |
25853 | 120 ** Faces and frame parameters. |
121 | |
122 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
123 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
124 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
125 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
126 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
127 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
128 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
129 | |
130 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
131 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
26264 | 132 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
25853 | 133 `default' face and vice versa. |
134 | |
25951 | 135 ** New face `menu'. |
136 | |
137 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
138 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; | |
139 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. | |
140 | |
25853 | 141 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
142 | |
143 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
144 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
145 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
146 the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
147 | |
148 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
149 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
150 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
151 | |
152 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
153 `ScreenGamma'. | |
154 | |
155 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | |
156 | |
157 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
158 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
159 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
160 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
161 the text. | |
162 | |
163 ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
164 | |
165 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
166 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
167 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
168 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
169 specify a font. | |
170 | |
171 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
172 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
173 under Lisp changes, below. | |
174 | |
175 ** New default font is Courier 12pt. | |
176 | |
177 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of | |
178 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise, | |
179 it is hollow. | |
180 | |
181 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
182 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
183 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
184 customizing face `fringe'. | |
185 | |
186 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You | |
187 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'. | |
188 | |
189 ** LessTif support. | |
190 | |
191 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will | |
192 need a version 0.88.1 or later. | |
193 | |
194 ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
195 | |
196 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for | |
197 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when | |
198 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
199 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
200 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
201 Emacs. | |
202 | |
203 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
204 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
205 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
206 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
207 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
208 `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
209 | |
210 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
211 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
212 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
213 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
214 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
215 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
216 | |
217 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
218 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
219 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
220 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
221 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
222 | |
223 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
224 | |
225 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
226 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
227 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
228 | |
229 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
230 | |
231 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
232 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
233 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
234 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
235 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
236 whitespace. | |
237 | |
238 ** Busy-cursor. | |
239 | |
240 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the | |
241 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
242 | |
243 ** Blinking cursor | |
244 | |
245 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
246 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
247 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
248 the group `cursor'. | |
249 | |
250 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
251 | |
252 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
253 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
254 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
255 details. | |
256 | |
257 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
258 have to do anything to activate it. | |
259 | |
260 ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
261 | |
262 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
263 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
264 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
265 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
266 | |
267 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
268 | |
269 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
270 | |
271 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
272 | |
273 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif | |
274 one. | |
275 | |
276 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in | |
277 Motif. | |
278 | |
279 ** Hscrolling in C code. | |
280 | |
281 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically. | |
282 | |
283 ** Tool bar support. | |
284 | |
285 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
286 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes. | |
287 | |
288 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
289 | |
290 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made | |
291 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode | |
292 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help | |
293 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or | |
294 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. | |
295 | |
296 Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
297 | |
298 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
299 buffers. | |
300 | |
301 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
302 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
303 | |
304 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
305 | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
306 - Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*') |
25853 | 307 toggles the read-only status. |
308 | |
309 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu. | |
310 | |
311 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
312 | |
313 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
26652 | 314 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
25853 | 315 non-nil. |
316 | |
317 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
318 | |
319 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
320 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
321 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
322 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
323 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
324 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored. | |
325 | |
326 ** Sound support | |
327 | |
328 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
329 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
330 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
331 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
332 to enable sound support. | |
333 | |
334 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives | |
335 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
336 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
337 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
338 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
339 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
340 | |
341 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
342 | |
343 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. | |
344 | |
345 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
346 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
347 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
348 | |
349 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
350 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
351 | |
352 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
353 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
354 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
355 | |
356 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
357 | |
358 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
359 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a | |
360 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
361 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. | |
362 | |
363 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
364 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a | |
365 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
366 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. | |
367 | |
368 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
369 notably at the end of lines. | |
370 | |
371 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
372 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
373 | |
28132 | 374 There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle. |
375 | |
25853 | 376 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
377 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
378 after each match to get the replacement text. | |
379 | |
380 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. | |
381 | |
382 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are | |
383 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is | |
384 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size | |
385 by setting the following variable: | |
386 | |
387 - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
388 | |
389 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
390 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
391 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize. | |
392 | |
393 Default is 0.25. | |
394 | |
27017 | 395 ** Changes to hideshow.el |
396 | |
397 Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block | |
398 selection and traversal and includes more isearch support. | |
399 | |
400 *** Generalized block selection and traversal | |
401 | |
402 A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps | |
403 (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying | |
404 which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a | |
405 `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts | |
406 point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func' | |
407 (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp'). | |
408 | |
409 If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero, | |
410 i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is | |
411 backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see | |
412 the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details. | |
413 | |
414 *** Isearch support for updating mode line | |
415 | |
416 During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden | |
417 blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the | |
418 line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden | |
419 portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block | |
420 is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil. | |
421 | |
422 To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include | |
423 something like this in your .emacs. | |
424 | |
425 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook | |
426 (lambda () | |
427 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline))) | |
428 | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
429 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
430 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
431 If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
432 entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
433 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
434 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
435 New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
436 buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary. |
27005
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
437 |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
438 Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
439 if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
440 |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
441 The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
442 expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
443 cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
444 a file. |
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
445 |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
446 ** Changes in Font Lock |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
447 |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
448 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
449 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
450 mode. |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
451 |
26606 | 452 ** Comint (subshell) changes |
453 | |
454 Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes | |
455 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. | |
456 | |
457 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and | |
458 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current | |
459 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
460 | |
461 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
462 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
463 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
464 | |
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
465 ** Changes to Rmail mode |
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
466 |
27361 | 467 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
468 like `j'. | |
469 | |
27381
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
470 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
471 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
27378
af3075bcc264
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27369
diff
changeset
|
472 digest message. |
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
473 |
26271 | 474 ** Changes to TeX mode |
475 | |
476 The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to | |
477 `latex-mode'. | |
478 | |
25853 | 479 ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
480 | |
481 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
482 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
483 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
484 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
485 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
486 can be edited from that buffer. | |
487 | |
488 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
489 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
490 `A' to use all marked entries). | |
491 | |
492 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
493 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
494 | |
495 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
496 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
497 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
498 been cited. | |
499 | |
26684
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
500 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
501 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
502 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
503 in column 1 are always made leaves. |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
504 |
25853 | 505 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
506 has the following new features: | |
507 | |
508 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
509 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
510 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
511 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
512 | |
513 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
514 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
515 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
516 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
517 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
518 defaults to 1. | |
519 | |
520 ** Tooltips. | |
521 | |
522 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
523 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you | |
524 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
525 | |
526 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
527 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
528 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
529 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
530 | |
531 ** Customize changes | |
532 | |
533 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
26096 | 534 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will |
535 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs. | |
25853 | 536 |
537 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
538 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
539 default). | |
540 | |
26834
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
541 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
542 between custom options. Example: |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
543 |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
544 (defcustom default-input-method nil |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
545 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
546 This is the input method activated automatically by the command |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
547 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
548 :group 'mule |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
549 :type '(choice (const nil) string) |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
550 :set-after '(current-language-environment)) |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
551 |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
552 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
553 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
554 first in a custom-set-variables statement. |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
555 |
25853 | 556 ** New features in evaluation commands |
557 | |
558 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp | |
559 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | |
560 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
561 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
562 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
563 | |
564 ** Dired changes | |
565 | |
566 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
567 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
568 is, delete only empty directories. | |
569 | |
570 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
571 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
572 copy directories recursively. | |
573 | |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
574 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
575 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
576 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
577 |
25853 | 578 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
579 use the -f option when sending mail. | |
580 | |
26820 | 581 ** CC mode changes. |
582 | |
583 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
584 current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
585 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
586 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
587 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
588 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
589 release. | |
590 | |
591 *** New initialization procedure for the style system. | |
592 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
593 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
594 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
595 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
596 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
597 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
598 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
599 | |
600 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
601 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
602 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
603 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
604 above. | |
605 | |
606 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
607 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
608 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
609 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
610 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
611 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
612 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
613 function documentation for more info. | |
614 | |
615 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
616 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
617 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
618 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
619 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
620 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
621 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
622 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
623 | |
624 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
625 | |
626 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
627 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
628 | |
629 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
630 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
631 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
632 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
633 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
634 style system. | |
635 | |
636 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
637 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
638 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
639 as far as possible. | |
640 | |
641 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
642 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
643 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
644 chapter about this in the manual. | |
645 | |
646 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
647 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
648 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
649 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
650 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
651 | |
652 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
653 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
654 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
655 | |
656 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
657 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
658 | |
659 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
660 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
661 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
662 inside CC Mode. | |
663 | |
664 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
665 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
666 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
667 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
668 cc-mode/). | |
669 | |
670 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
671 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
672 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
673 literals. | |
674 | |
675 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
676 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
677 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
678 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
679 this function. | |
680 | |
681 *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
682 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
683 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
684 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
685 Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
686 | |
687 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
688 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
689 opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
690 | |
691 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
692 | |
693 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
694 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
695 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
696 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
697 | |
698 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
699 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
700 the column specified by comment-column. | |
701 | |
702 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
703 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
704 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
705 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
706 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
707 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
708 | |
709 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
710 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
711 arguments. | |
712 | |
713 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
714 | |
715 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
716 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
717 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
718 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
719 Provan). | |
720 | |
721 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
722 | |
26407 | 723 ** Isearch changes |
724 | |
725 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current | |
25853 | 726 selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
727 | |
26407 | 728 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
729 | |
26417 | 730 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
26407 | 731 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
732 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
733 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
734 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
735 `secondary-selection'. | |
736 | |
737 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
738 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
739 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
740 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
741 usual snappy response. | |
742 | |
743 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
744 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
745 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
746 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
747 | |
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
748 ** Changes in sort.el |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
749 |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
750 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
27533
6dfbe5197843
A typo ("ocatal" instead of "octal").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27498
diff
changeset
|
751 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
752 new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
753 numeric base. |
26407 | 754 |
25929 | 755 ** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
756 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash | |
757 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
758 | |
25984 | 759 ** Shell script mode changes. |
760 | |
761 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
762 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and | |
763 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
764 | |
26264 | 765 ** Etags changes. |
766 | |
767 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
768 | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
769 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
770 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
771 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
772 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
773 a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
774 |
26264 | 775 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
776 declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
777 | |
778 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
779 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
26264 | 780 |
781 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and | |
782 types. | |
783 | |
784 *** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged. | |
785 | |
786 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
787 | |
788 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
789 are now tagged. | |
790 | |
791 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local | |
792 variables are tagged. | |
793 | |
794 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
795 | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
796 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
797 for PSWrap. |
26264 | 798 |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
799 ** Changes in etags.el |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
800 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
801 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
802 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
803 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
804 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
805 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
806 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
807 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
808 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
809 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
810 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
811 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
812 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
813 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
814 A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
815 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
816 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
817 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
818 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
819 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
820 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
821 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
822 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
823 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
824 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
825 |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
826 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
827 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
828 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
829 |
26016 | 830 ** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
831 These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14 | |
832 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is | |
833 currently no specific input method support for them. | |
834 | |
26652 | 835 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to |
836 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now | |
837 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
838 | |
839 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
840 | |
26768 | 841 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
842 | |
25853 | 843 ** New modes and packages |
844 | |
28098 | 845 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
846 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
847 | |
848 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
849 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
850 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
851 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
852 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
853 single step. | |
854 | |
855 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
856 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
857 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
858 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
859 | |
27644 | 860 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
861 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
862 actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
863 | |
27498 | 864 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
865 PostScript. | |
866 | |
867 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
868 | |
869 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
870 | |
871 ; comment (until end of line) | |
872 A non-terminal | |
873 "C" terminal | |
874 ?C? special | |
875 $A default non-terminal | |
876 $"C" default terminal | |
877 $?C? default special | |
878 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
879 C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
880 C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
881 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
882 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
883 (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
884 [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
885 C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
886 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
887 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
888 {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
889 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
890 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
891 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
892 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
893 | |
894 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
895 | |
27328 | 896 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
897 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
898 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
899 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
900 equal signs of assignments. | |
901 | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
902 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
903 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
904 |
27016 | 905 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
906 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
907 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to | |
908 customize the package. | |
909 | |
27733 | 910 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
911 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
912 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
913 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
914 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
915 which answers different needs. | |
916 | |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
917 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
918 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
919 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
920 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
921 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
922 to be enabled. |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
923 |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
924 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
925 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
926 |
25853 | 927 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
928 | |
929 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. | |
930 | |
931 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
932 | |
933 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object | |
934 Pascal) language. | |
935 | |
936 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
937 the text at point. | |
938 | |
939 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
940 | |
25862 | 941 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
942 | |
25853 | 943 *** whitespace.el ??? |
944 | |
25992 | 945 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
946 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
947 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
948 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
949 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
950 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
951 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
952 | |
953 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
954 | |
955 Here is an example of columns: | |
956 | |
957 horse apple bus | |
958 dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
959 porcupine strawberry airplane | |
960 | |
961 Doing the following settings: | |
962 | |
963 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
964 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
965 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
966 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
967 | |
968 | |
969 Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
970 | |
971 M-x delimit-columns-region | |
972 | |
973 It results: | |
974 | |
975 [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
976 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
977 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
978 | |
979 delim-col has the following options: | |
980 | |
981 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
982 before all columns. | |
983 | |
984 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
985 between each column. | |
986 | |
987 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
988 after all columns. | |
989 | |
990 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
991 each column. | |
992 | |
993 delim-col has the following commands: | |
994 | |
995 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
996 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
997 | |
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
998 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
999 were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1000 is displayed in the "Files" menu. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1001 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1002 The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1003 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1004 To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1005 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1006 To enable recentf at Emacs startup use |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1007 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1008 |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1009 To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1010 M-x customize-group RET recentf RET. |
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
1011 |
26149 | 1012 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
1013 text. | |
1014 | |
26924 | 1015 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
26786 | 1016 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
1017 specific to Message mode. | |
1018 | |
26924 | 1019 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
1020 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
1021 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
1022 | |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1023 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1024 interface to access directory servers using different directory |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1025 protocols. It has a separate manual. |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1026 |
28132 | 1027 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
1028 for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
1029 | |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1030 *** windmove.el |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
1031 |
25853 | 1032 ** Withdrawn packages |
1033 | |
1034 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
1035 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
26133 | 1036 |
27369 | 1037 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
1038 | |
1039 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
25853 | 1040 |
1041 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) | |
1042 | |
1043 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
1044 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
1045 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
1046 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
1047 | |
28037 | 1048 ** The function documentation-property now evaluates the value of |
1049 the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC | |
1050 and isn't a string. | |
1051 | |
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1052 +++ |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1053 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1054 |
28149 | 1055 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1056 for a regexp in a string. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1057 |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1058 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1059 `mouse-position-function'. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
1060 |
27827 | 1061 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
1062 that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
1063 | |
27820 | 1064 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
1065 Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
1066 | |
27770 | 1067 +++ |
1068 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and | |
1069 returns it. | |
1070 | |
27276 | 1071 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
1072 returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
1073 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1074 +++ |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1075 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1076 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1077 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1078 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1079 mode. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1080 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1081 +++ |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1082 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1083 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1084 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1085 +++ |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1086 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1087 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1088 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1089 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1090 been performed." |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1091 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1092 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1093 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1094 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1095 then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1096 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1097 +++ |
26737 | 1098 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
1099 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
1100 and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
1101 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1102 +++ |
26467 | 1103 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
1104 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
1105 specified table. | |
1106 | |
1107 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
1108 | |
1109 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
26541
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1110 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1111 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
1112 what BODY returns. |
26467 | 1113 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1114 +++ |
27693
d8bedafef8d5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27644
diff
changeset
|
1115 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
28063
f1b33463506d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28051
diff
changeset
|
1116 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1117 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1118 +++ |
26397
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1119 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1120 removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
1121 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1122 +++ |
26360
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1123 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1124 instead of being optional. |
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
1125 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1126 +++ |
26277
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1127 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1128 modify read-only text. |
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
1129 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1130 +++ |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1131 ** New functions and variables for locales. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1132 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1133 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1134 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1135 time functions like strftime. The new variables |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1136 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1137 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1138 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1139 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1140 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1141 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1142 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1143 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1144 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
1145 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1146 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1147 +++ |
26107
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1148 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1149 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1150 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1151 start sequences. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
1152 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1153 +++ |
25910
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1154 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1155 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
1156 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1157 +++ |
25853 | 1158 ** New function `propertize' |
1159 | |
1160 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
1161 strings with text properties. | |
1162 | |
1163 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
1164 | |
1165 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
1166 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
1167 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
1168 specified value of that property. Example: | |
1169 | |
1170 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
1171 | |
1172 +++ | |
1173 ** push and pop macros. | |
1174 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1175 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1176 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
25853 | 1177 as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
1178 | |
1179 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
1180 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
1181 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
1182 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1183 ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1184 |
27387
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
1185 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
1186 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1187 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1188 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1189 Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1190 using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1191 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1192 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1193 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1194 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1195 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1196 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
1197 |
25853 | 1198 +++ |
1199 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such | |
1200 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. | |
1201 | |
1202 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
1203 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
1204 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
1205 [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
1206 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
1207 space, and DEL. | |
1208 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
1209 and DEL. | |
1210 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
1211 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1212 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
1213 [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
1214 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1215 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
1216 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
1217 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
1218 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
1219 [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
1220 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
1221 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
1222 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
1223 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
1224 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
1225 | |
1226 +++ | |
1227 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
1228 | |
1229 The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
1230 | |
1231 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
1232 | |
1233 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
1234 are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
1235 | |
1236 :test TEST | |
1237 | |
1238 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
1239 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
1240 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
1241 | |
1242 :size SIZE | |
1243 | |
1244 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
1245 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
1246 | |
1247 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
1248 | |
1249 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
1250 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
1251 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
1252 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
1253 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
1254 | |
1255 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
1256 | |
1257 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
1258 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
1259 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
1260 | |
1261 :weakness WEAK | |
1262 | |
1263 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t. | |
1264 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if | |
1265 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the | |
1266 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
1267 | |
1268 - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
1269 | |
1270 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
1271 | |
1272 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
1273 | |
1274 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
1275 | |
1276 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
1277 | |
1278 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
1279 values are shared. | |
1280 | |
1281 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
1282 | |
1283 Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
1284 | |
1285 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
1286 | |
1287 Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
1288 | |
1289 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
1290 | |
1291 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
1292 | |
1293 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
1294 | |
1295 Returns the size of TABLE. | |
1296 | |
1297 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE | |
1298 | |
1299 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
1300 | |
1301 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
1302 | |
1303 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
1304 | |
1305 - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
1306 | |
1307 Clear TABLE. | |
1308 | |
1309 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
1310 | |
1311 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
1312 not found. | |
1313 | |
26264 | 1314 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
25853 | 1315 |
1316 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
1317 another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
1318 | |
1319 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
1320 | |
1321 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
1322 | |
1323 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
1324 | |
1325 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
1326 arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
1327 | |
1328 - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
1329 | |
1330 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
1331 | |
1332 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
1333 | |
1334 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
1335 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
26264 | 1336 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
25853 | 1337 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
1338 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
1339 | |
1340 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
1341 | |
1342 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
1343 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
1344 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
1345 | |
1346 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
1347 be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
1348 | |
1349 (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
1350 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
1351 | |
1352 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
1353 (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
1354 | |
26264 | 1355 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
25853 | 1356 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
1357 | |
1358 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
1359 | |
1360 +++ | |
1361 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
1362 | |
1363 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
1364 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
1365 a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
1366 | |
1367 +++ | |
1368 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
1369 | |
1370 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
1371 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
1372 | |
1373 +++ | |
1374 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
1375 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
1376 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
1377 is too short to reach that column. | |
1378 | |
1379 +++ | |
1380 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
1381 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
1382 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
1383 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
1384 | |
1385 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
1386 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
1387 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
1388 | |
1389 +++ | |
1390 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
1391 to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
1392 | |
1393 +++ | |
1394 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
1395 calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
1396 | |
1397 +++ | |
1398 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
1399 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
1400 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
1401 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
1402 temporary-file-directory instead. | |
1403 | |
1404 +++ | |
1405 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
1406 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
1407 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
1408 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
1409 | |
1410 +++ | |
1411 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | |
1412 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. | |
1413 | |
1414 +++ | |
1415 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
1416 | |
1417 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
1418 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
1419 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
1420 | |
1421 +++ | |
1422 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
1423 | |
1424 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
1425 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
1426 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
1427 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
1428 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
1429 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
1430 | |
1431 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
1432 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
1433 to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
1434 The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
1435 | |
1436 +++ | |
1437 ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
1438 | |
1439 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
1440 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
1441 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
1442 result string. | |
1443 | |
1444 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
1445 string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
1446 | |
1447 Example: | |
1448 | |
1449 (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
1450 (s2 "world")) | |
1451 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
1452 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
26034 | 1453 (format s1 s2)) |
25853 | 1454 |
1455 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
1456 | |
1457 +++ | |
1458 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
1459 | |
1460 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
1461 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
1462 argument in it. | |
1463 | |
1464 (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
1465 (arg "world")) | |
1466 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
1467 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
1468 (message msg arg)) | |
1469 | |
1470 +++ | |
1471 ** Sound support | |
1472 | |
1473 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
1474 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
1475 | |
1476 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
1477 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
1478 to enable sound support. | |
1479 | |
1480 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
1481 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
1482 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
1483 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
1484 sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
1485 | |
1486 The following sound properties are supported: | |
1487 | |
1488 - `:file FILE' | |
1489 | |
1490 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
1491 searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
1492 | |
27148 | 1493 - `:data DATA' |
1494 | |
1495 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
1496 may be present, but not both. | |
1497 | |
25853 | 1498 - `:volume VOLUME' |
1499 | |
1500 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
1501 0..1. This property is optional. | |
1502 | |
1503 Other properties are ignored. | |
1504 | |
1505 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. | |
26933 | 1506 |
1507 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being | |
1508 a keyword symbol. | |
27145
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1509 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1510 ** Changes to garbage collection |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1511 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1512 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1513 of live and free strings. |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1514 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1515 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1516 strings that have been consed so far. |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
1517 |
25853 | 1518 |
1519 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 | |
1520 | |
1521 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
1522 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
1523 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
1524 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
1525 | |
1526 ** New face implementation. | |
1527 | |
1528 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
1529 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
1530 | |
1531 +++ | |
1532 *** New faces. | |
1533 | |
1534 Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
1535 | |
1536 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
26264 | 1537 |
25853 | 1538 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
1539 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
26264 | 1540 |
25853 | 1541 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
26264 | 1542 |
25853 | 1543 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
26264 | 1544 |
25853 | 1545 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
26264 | 1546 |
25853 | 1547 6. Foreground color. |
26264 | 1548 |
25853 | 1549 7. Background color. |
1550 | |
1551 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
1552 | |
1553 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
1554 | |
1555 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
1556 | |
1557 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
1558 | |
1559 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
1560 color. | |
1561 | |
1562 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
1563 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
1564 | |
1565 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
1566 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
1567 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
1568 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
1569 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face | |
1570 attributes mentioned above. | |
1571 | |
1572 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
1573 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
1574 created frames. | |
26264 | 1575 |
25853 | 1576 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
1577 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
1578 `fully-specified'. | |
1579 | |
1580 +++ | |
1581 *** Face merging. | |
1582 | |
1583 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
1584 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
1585 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
1586 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
1587 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
1588 results in a fully-specified face. | |
1589 | |
1590 +++ | |
1591 *** Face realization. | |
1592 | |
1593 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
1594 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
1595 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
1596 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
1597 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
1598 cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
1599 | |
1600 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
1601 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
1602 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
1603 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
1604 | |
1605 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
1606 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
1607 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
1608 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
1609 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
1610 | |
1611 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
1612 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
1613 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
1614 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
1615 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
1616 Emacs. | |
1617 | |
1618 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
1619 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
1620 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
1621 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
1622 | |
1623 ++++ | |
1624 **** Clearing face caches. | |
1625 | |
1626 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
1627 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
1628 unused fonts. | |
1629 | |
1630 +++ | |
1631 *** Font selection. | |
26264 | 1632 |
25853 | 1633 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
1634 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
1635 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
1636 | |
1637 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
1638 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
1639 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
1640 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
1641 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
1642 | |
1643 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
1644 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
1645 match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
1646 | |
1647 Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
1648 | |
1649 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
1650 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
1651 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
1652 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
1653 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
1654 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
1655 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
1656 | |
1657 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to | |
1658 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a | |
1659 face doesn't exist. | |
1660 | |
1661 +++ | |
1662 **** Scalable fonts | |
1663 | |
1664 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
1665 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
1666 servers. | |
1667 | |
1668 To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
26034 | 1669 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
25853 | 1670 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
1671 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
1672 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
1673 that list. Example: | |
1674 | |
1675 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
1676 | |
1677 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
1678 | |
1679 +++ | |
1680 *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
1681 | |
1682 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
1683 | |
1684 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
1685 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
1686 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
1687 | |
1688 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
1689 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
1690 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
1691 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
1692 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
1693 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
1694 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
1695 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
1696 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
1697 of the face font sort order. | |
1698 | |
26264 | 1699 - Function: x-font-family-list |
25853 | 1700 |
1701 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
1702 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
1703 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
1704 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
1705 | |
1706 - Variable: font-list-limit | |
1707 | |
1708 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
1709 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
1710 matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
1711 | |
1712 +++ | |
1713 *** Setting face attributes. | |
1714 | |
1715 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
1716 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
1717 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
1718 `face-attribute'. | |
1719 | |
1720 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
1721 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
1722 | |
1723 The following attributes are recognized: | |
1724 | |
1725 `:family' | |
1726 | |
1727 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
1728 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
1729 and `?' are allowed. | |
1730 | |
1731 `:width' | |
1732 | |
1733 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
1734 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
1735 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
1736 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
1737 | |
1738 `:height' | |
1739 | |
1740 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in | |
1741 1/10 pt. | |
1742 | |
1743 `:weight' | |
1744 | |
1745 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
1746 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
1747 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
1748 | |
1749 `:slant' | |
1750 | |
1751 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
1752 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
1753 `reverse-oblique'. | |
1754 | |
1755 `:foreground', `:background' | |
1756 | |
1757 VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
1758 | |
1759 `:underline' | |
1760 | |
1761 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
1762 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
1763 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
1764 don't underline. | |
1765 | |
1766 `:overline' | |
1767 | |
1768 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
1769 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
1770 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
1771 overline. | |
1772 | |
1773 `:strike-through' | |
1774 | |
1775 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
1776 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
1777 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
1778 is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
1779 | |
1780 `:box' | |
1781 | |
1782 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
1783 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
1784 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
1785 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
1786 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
1787 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
1788 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
1789 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
1790 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
1791 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
1792 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
1793 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
1794 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
1795 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
1796 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
1797 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
1798 box. | |
1799 | |
1800 `:inverse-video' | |
1801 | |
1802 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
1803 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
1804 | |
1805 `:stipple' | |
1806 | |
1807 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
1808 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
1809 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
1810 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
1811 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
1812 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
1813 | |
1814 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
1815 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
1816 | |
1817 `:font' | |
1818 | |
1819 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
1820 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
1821 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
1822 versions of Emacs. | |
1823 | |
1824 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
1825 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
1826 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
1827 | |
1828 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
1829 `defface'. | |
1830 | |
1831 *** Face attributes and X resources | |
1832 | |
1833 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
1834 from X resources: | |
1835 | |
1836 Face attribute X resource class | |
1837 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
1838 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
1839 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
1840 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
1841 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
1842 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
1843 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
1844 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
1845 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
1846 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
1847 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
1848 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
1849 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
1850 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
26264 | 1851 or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
25853 | 1852 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
1853 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
1854 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
1855 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
1856 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
1857 | |
1858 +++ | |
1859 *** Text property `face'. | |
1860 | |
1861 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
1862 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
1863 specification can be | |
1864 | |
1865 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
1866 | |
1867 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
1868 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
1869 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
1870 for face attribute names. | |
1871 | |
1872 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
1873 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
1874 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
1875 | |
1876 +++ | |
1877 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
1878 | |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1879 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1880 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1881 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
25853 | 1882 default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1883 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
25853 | 1884 used to clear the mapping table. |
1885 | |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1886 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1887 |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1888 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1889 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1890 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1891 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1892 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1893 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1894 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1895 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1896 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1897 modify their color-related behavior. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1898 |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1899 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1900 any frame type. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
1901 |
27573
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1902 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1903 |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1904 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1905 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1906 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1907 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1908 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1909 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1910 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1911 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1912 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
1913 |
25853 | 1914 +++ |
1915 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1916 |
25853 | 1917 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
1918 | |
1919 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the | |
1920 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. | |
1921 Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
1922 | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1923 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1924 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1925 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1926 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1927 text-property. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1928 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1929 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1930 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1931 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1932 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
27144 | 1933 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
1934 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
1935 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
1936 functions. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1937 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1938 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1939 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
1940 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
25853 | 1941 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1942 The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1943 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1944 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1945 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1946 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1947 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1948 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1949 constrained position if that is is different. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1950 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1951 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1952 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1953 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1954 constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1955 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1956 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1957 fields. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1958 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1959 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1960 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1961 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1962 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1963 only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1964 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1965 - Function: erase-field &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1966 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1967 Erases the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1968 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1969 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1970 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1971 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1972 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1973 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1974 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1975 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1976 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1977 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1978 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1979 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1980 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1981 Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1982 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1983 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1984 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field, |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1985 then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1986 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1987 - Function: field-string &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1988 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1989 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1990 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1991 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1992 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1993 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1994 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1995 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1996 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1997 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
1998 |
25853 | 1999 +++ |
2000 ** Image support. | |
2001 | |
2002 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
2003 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
2004 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
2005 replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
2006 | |
2007 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
2008 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
2009 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
2010 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
2011 area. | |
2012 | |
2013 IMAGE is an image specification. | |
2014 | |
2015 *** Image specifications | |
2016 | |
2017 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
2018 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
2019 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
26403 | 2020 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
2021 described below are ignored. | |
25853 | 2022 |
2023 The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
2024 | |
2025 `:ascent ASCENT' | |
2026 | |
2027 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage | |
2028 of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50. | |
2029 | |
2030 `:margin MARGIN' | |
2031 | |
26264 | 2032 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as |
25853 | 2033 margin around the image. Default is 0. |
2034 | |
2035 `:relief RELIEF' | |
2036 | |
2037 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
2038 around an image. | |
2039 | |
2040 `:algorithm ALGO' | |
2041 | |
2042 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must | |
2043 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is | |
2044 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image | |
2045 which is intended to display images "disabled." | |
2046 | |
2047 `:heuristic-mask BG' | |
2048 | |
2049 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the | |
2050 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t, | |
2051 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4 | |
2052 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from | |
2053 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must | |
2054 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the | |
2055 background of the image. | |
2056 | |
2057 `:file FILE' | |
2058 | |
2059 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
2060 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
2061 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
2062 may be present in the image specification. | |
2063 | |
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2064 `:data DATA' |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2065 |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2066 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2067 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2068 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2069 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2070 |
25853 | 2071 *** Supported image types |
2072 | |
26034 | 2073 **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
25853 | 2074 |
2075 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
2076 properties supported are | |
2077 | |
2078 `:foreground FG' | |
2079 | |
2080 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
2081 is the frame's foreground. | |
2082 | |
2083 `:background FG' | |
2084 | |
2085 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
2086 the frame's background color. | |
2087 | |
2088 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
2089 case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
2090 instead of a `:file' property. | |
2091 | |
2092 `:width WIDTH' | |
2093 | |
2094 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
2095 | |
2096 `:height HEIGHT' | |
2097 | |
2098 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
2099 | |
2100 `:data DATA' | |
2101 | |
2102 DATA must be either | |
2103 | |
2104 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
2105 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
2106 | |
2107 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
2108 | |
2109 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
2110 bitmap. | |
2111 | |
2112 **** XPM, image type `xpm' | |
2113 | |
2114 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
2115 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
2116 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
2117 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
2118 | |
2119 Additional image properties supported are: | |
2120 | |
2121 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
2122 | |
2123 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
2124 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
2125 name. | |
2126 | |
2127 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
2128 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
2129 | |
2130 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | |
2131 to display compressed images. | |
2132 | |
2133 **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
2134 | |
2135 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
2136 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties | |
2137 defined. | |
2138 | |
2139 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
2140 | |
2141 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
27055 | 2142 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
2143 are: | |
2144 | |
25853 | 2145 **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
2146 | |
2147 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
2148 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
2149 properties defined. | |
2150 | |
2151 **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
2152 | |
2153 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
2154 `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
2155 | |
2156 Additional image properties supported are: | |
2157 | |
2158 `:index INDEX' | |
2159 | |
2160 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
2161 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large. | |
2162 | |
2163 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
2164 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
2165 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
2166 every 0.1 seconds. | |
2167 | |
2168 (defun show-anim (file max) | |
2169 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
2170 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
2171 | |
2172 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
2173 (when (= idx max) | |
2174 (setq idx 0)) | |
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
2175 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
25853 | 2176 (save-excursion |
2177 (set-buffer buffer) | |
2178 (goto-char (point-min)) | |
2179 (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
2180 (insert-image img "x")) | |
2181 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
2182 | |
2183 **** PNG, image type `png' | |
2184 | |
2185 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
2186 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
2187 properties defined. | |
2188 | |
2189 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
2190 | |
2191 Additional image properties supported are: | |
2192 | |
2193 `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
2194 | |
2195 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
26034 | 2196 integer. This is a required property. |
25853 | 2197 |
2198 `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
2199 | |
2200 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
26034 | 2201 must be a integer. This is an required property. |
25853 | 2202 |
2203 `:bounding-box BOX' | |
2204 | |
2205 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
2206 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
2207 files. This is an required property. | |
2208 | |
2209 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
2210 lisp/gs.el. | |
2211 | |
2212 *** Lisp interface. | |
2213 | |
26264 | 2214 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
2215 which are supported in the current configuration. | |
25853 | 2216 |
2217 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
2218 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
2219 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
2220 manually. | |
2221 | |
2222 *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
2223 | |
2224 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
2225 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
2226 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
2227 define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
2228 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
2229 buffer. | |
2230 | |
2231 +++ | |
2232 ** Display margins. | |
2233 | |
2234 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
2235 and images. | |
2236 | |
2237 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
2238 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
2239 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
2240 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
2241 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
2242 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
2243 of the display margins. | |
2244 | |
2245 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
2246 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
2247 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
2248 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
2249 in this file). | |
2250 | |
2251 +++ | |
2252 ** Help display | |
2253 | |
2254 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
2255 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
2256 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
2257 that have a `help-echo' property. | |
2258 | |
2259 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar | |
2260 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display. | |
2261 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is | |
2262 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the | |
2263 tool-bar item is used. | |
2264 | |
2265 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
2266 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the | |
2267 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
2268 | |
2269 +++ | |
2270 ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
2271 | |
2272 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
2273 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
2274 | |
2275 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
2276 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
2277 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
2278 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
2279 used. | |
2280 | |
26264 | 2281 (global-set-key [A-down] |
2282 #'(lambda () | |
25853 | 2283 (interactive) |
26264 | 2284 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
25853 | 2285 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
26264 | 2286 (global-set-key [A-up] |
25853 | 2287 #'(lambda () |
2288 (interactive) | |
26264 | 2289 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
25853 | 2290 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
2291 | |
2292 +++ | |
2293 ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
2294 | |
2295 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
2296 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
2297 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
2298 is called with one argument, POS. | |
2299 | |
2300 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
2301 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
2302 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
2303 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
2304 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
2305 | |
2306 +++ | |
2307 ** Tool bar support. | |
2308 | |
2309 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
2310 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
2311 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
2312 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
2313 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
2314 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
2315 | |
2316 *** Tool bar item definitions | |
2317 | |
2318 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
2319 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
2320 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
26264 | 2321 |
25853 | 2322 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
2323 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
2324 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
2325 property (see below). | |
26264 | 2326 |
25853 | 2327 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
2328 binding are currently ignored. | |
2329 | |
2330 The following properties are recognized: | |
2331 | |
2332 `:enable FORM'. | |
26264 | 2333 |
25853 | 2334 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
2335 or disabled. | |
26264 | 2336 |
25853 | 2337 `:visible FORM' |
26264 | 2338 |
25853 | 2339 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
26264 | 2340 |
25853 | 2341 `:filter FUNCTION' |
2342 | |
2343 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
2344 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
2345 used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
26264 | 2346 |
25853 | 2347 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
2348 | |
2349 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
2350 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
26264 | 2351 |
25853 | 2352 `:image IMAGES' |
2353 | |
2354 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
2355 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
2356 meaning of each of the four elements: | |
2357 | |
2358 Index Use when item is | |
2359 ---------------------------------------- | |
2360 0 enabled and selected | |
2361 1 enabled and deselected | |
2362 2 disabled and selected | |
2363 3 disabled and deselected | |
26264 | 2364 |
25853 | 2365 `:help HELP-STRING'. |
26264 | 2366 |
25853 | 2367 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
2368 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
2369 | |
2370 *** Tool-bar-related variables. | |
2371 | |
2372 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
2373 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
2374 than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
2375 | |
26264 | 2376 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
25853 | 2377 raised when the mouse moves over them. |
2378 | |
2379 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
2380 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
2381 pixels. Default is 1. | |
2382 | |
2383 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
2384 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
2385 | |
2386 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
2387 | |
2388 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
26264 | 2389 a tool bar item. If |
25853 | 2390 |
2391 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
2392 '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
2393 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
2394 | |
2395 is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
2396 | |
2397 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
2398 | |
2399 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
2400 item. | |
2401 | |
2402 ** Mode line changes. | |
2403 | |
2404 +++ | |
2405 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
2406 | |
2407 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
2408 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
2409 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
2410 | |
2411 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
2412 a `local-map' text property. | |
2413 | |
2414 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
2415 that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
2416 | |
2417 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
2418 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
2419 `local-map' property. | |
2420 | |
2421 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
2422 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
2423 example. | |
2424 | |
26359
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2425 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2426 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
2427 |
25853 | 2428 +++ |
2429 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
2430 variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
2431 | |
2432 +++ | |
2433 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
2434 | |
2435 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
2436 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
2437 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
2438 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
2439 line. | |
2440 | |
2441 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
2442 `header-line'. | |
2443 | |
2444 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
2445 position in the header-line. | |
2446 | |
2447 +++ | |
2448 ** Text property `display' | |
2449 | |
2450 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and | |
2451 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the | |
2452 `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
2453 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. | |
2454 | |
2455 *** Variable width and height spaces | |
2456 | |
2457 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
2458 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
2459 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
2460 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
2461 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
2462 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
2463 simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
2464 | |
2465 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
2466 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
2467 properties described below. | |
2468 | |
2469 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
2470 characters having the `display' property. | |
2471 | |
2472 - :width WIDTH | |
2473 | |
2474 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
2475 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
2476 | |
2477 - :relative-width FACTOR | |
2478 | |
2479 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
2480 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
2481 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
2482 width of that character by FACTOR. | |
2483 | |
2484 - :align-to HPOS | |
2485 | |
2486 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
2487 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
2488 | |
2489 Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
2490 | |
2491 - :height HEIGHT | |
2492 | |
2493 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
2494 normal line height. | |
2495 | |
2496 - :relative-height FACTOR | |
2497 | |
2498 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
2499 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
2500 | |
2501 - :ascent ASCENT | |
2502 | |
2503 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
2504 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
2505 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
2506 equal to 100. | |
2507 | |
2508 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
2509 | |
2510 *** Images | |
2511 | |
2512 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
2513 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
2514 in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
2515 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
2516 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
2517 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
2518 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
2519 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
2520 as display specification. | |
2521 | |
2522 *** Other display properties | |
2523 | |
2524 - :space-width FACTOR | |
2525 | |
2526 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
2527 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
2528 integer or float. | |
2529 | |
2530 - :height HEIGHT | |
2531 | |
2532 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
2533 | |
2534 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
2535 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
2536 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
2537 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
2538 a font is available counts as a step. | |
2539 | |
2540 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
2541 as tall as the frame's default font. | |
2542 | |
2543 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
2544 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
2545 | |
2546 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
2547 `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
2548 | |
2549 - :raise FACTOR | |
2550 | |
2551 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
2552 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
2553 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
2554 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
2555 `:height' subproperty. | |
2556 | |
2557 *** Conditional display properties | |
2558 | |
2559 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
2560 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
2561 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
2562 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of | |
2563 the text having the `display' property. | |
2564 | |
2565 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
2566 `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
2567 | |
2568 +++ | |
2569 ** New menu separator types. | |
2570 | |
2571 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
2572 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
2573 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
2574 to specify other menu separator types. | |
2575 | |
2576 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
2577 | |
2578 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
2579 separator occurs. | |
2580 | |
2581 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
2582 | |
2583 A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2584 | |
2585 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
2586 | |
2587 A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2588 | |
2589 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
2590 | |
2591 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2592 | |
2593 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
2594 | |
2595 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
2596 | |
2597 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
2598 | |
2599 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form | |
2600 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. | |
2601 | |
2602 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
2603 | |
2604 A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
2605 | |
2606 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
2607 | |
2608 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2609 | |
2610 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
2611 | |
2612 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
2613 | |
2614 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
2615 | |
2616 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2617 | |
2618 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
2619 | |
2620 Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
2621 | |
2622 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
2623 | |
2624 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
2625 | |
2626 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
2627 | |
2628 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
2629 | |
2630 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
2631 the corresponding single-line separators. | |
2632 | |
2633 +++ | |
2634 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
2635 | |
2636 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
2637 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
2638 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
2639 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
2640 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
2641 default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
2642 default foreground is black. | |
2643 | |
2644 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
2645 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
2646 `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
2647 | |
2648 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
2649 settings for scroll bar colors. | |
2650 | |
2651 +++ | |
2652 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
2653 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
2654 | |
2655 --- | |
2656 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
2657 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
2658 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
2659 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
2660 the original window start. | |
2661 | |
2662 --- | |
2663 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
2664 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
2665 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
2666 | |
2667 +++ | |
2668 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
2669 | |
2670 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
2671 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
2672 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
2673 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
2674 | |
2675 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
2676 fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
2677 | |
2678 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
2679 | |
2680 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
2681 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
2682 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
2683 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
2684 temporarily to nil, for example | |
2685 | |
2686 (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
2687 (enlarge-window 10)) | |
2688 | |
26264 | 2689 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
25853 | 2690 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
28094
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2691 |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2692 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2693 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2694 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2695 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2696 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
2697 support a vertical-bar cursor). |
26652 | 2698 ^L |
2699 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
2700 | |
2701 ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
2702 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
25853 | 2703 |
2704 * Changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
2705 | |
2706 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
2707 | |
2708 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
2709 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
2710 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
2711 | |
2712 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
2713 is the one that is used. | |
2714 | |
2715 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
2716 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
2717 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
2718 separate from the command's regular output. | |
2719 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
2720 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
2721 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
2722 the buffer name. | |
2723 | |
2724 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
2725 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
2726 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
2727 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
2728 | |
2729 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
2730 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
2731 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
2732 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
2733 | |
2734 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
2735 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
2736 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
2737 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
2738 | |
2739 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
2740 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
2741 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
2742 they never ignore case. | |
2743 | |
2744 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
2745 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
2746 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
2747 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
2748 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
2749 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
2750 part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
2751 | |
2752 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
2753 the same format that was used in the file before. | |
2754 | |
2755 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
2756 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
2757 | |
2758 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
2759 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
2760 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
2761 | |
2762 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
2763 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
2764 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
2765 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
2766 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
2767 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
2768 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
2769 | |
2770 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
2771 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
2772 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
2773 format. You can now customize these variables. | |
2774 | |
2775 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
2776 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
2777 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
2778 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
2779 | |
2780 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
2781 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
2782 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
2783 | |
2784 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
2785 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
2786 doesn't have any effect. | |
2787 | |
2788 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
2789 not one per buffer. | |
2790 | |
2791 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
2792 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
2793 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
2794 | |
2795 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
2796 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
2797 `auto-show-mode' command. | |
2798 | |
2799 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
2800 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
2801 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
2802 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
2803 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
2804 | |
2805 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
2806 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
2807 | |
2808 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
2809 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
2810 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
2811 | |
2812 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
2813 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
2814 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
2815 and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
2816 | |
2817 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
2818 | |
2819 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
2820 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
2821 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
2822 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
2823 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
2824 | |
2825 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
2826 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
2827 | |
2828 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
2829 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
2830 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
2831 `?' on other systems. | |
2832 | |
2833 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
2834 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
2835 Unix. | |
2836 | |
2837 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
2838 current codepage when it starts. | |
2839 | |
2840 ** Mail changes | |
2841 | |
28051 | 2842 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if |
2843 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
2844 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
2845 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
2846 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
2847 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
2848 latin-1: | |
2849 | |
2850 MIME-version: 1.0 | |
2851 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
2852 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
2853 | |
25853 | 2854 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the |
2855 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
2856 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
2857 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
2858 buffer-file-coding-system. | |
2859 | |
2860 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
2861 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
2862 mail. | |
2863 | |
2864 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
2865 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
2866 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
2867 list of possible coding systems. | |
2868 | |
2869 ** CC Mode changes | |
2870 | |
2871 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
2872 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
2873 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
2874 docstring for details. | |
2875 | |
2876 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
2877 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
2878 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
2879 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
2880 lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
2881 | |
2882 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
2883 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
2884 | |
2885 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
2886 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
2887 | |
2888 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
2889 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
2890 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
2891 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
2892 anonymous classes. | |
2893 | |
2894 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
2895 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
2896 | |
2897 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
2898 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
2899 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
2900 function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
2901 | |
2902 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
2903 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
2904 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
2905 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
2906 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
2907 | |
2908 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
2909 | |
2910 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
2911 | |
2912 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
2913 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
2914 | |
2915 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
2916 | |
2917 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
2918 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
2919 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
2920 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
2921 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
2922 | |
2923 ** Gnus changes. | |
2924 | |
2925 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
2926 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
2927 Gnus manual for the full story. | |
2928 | |
2929 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
2930 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
2931 group, which is created automatically. | |
2932 | |
2933 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
2934 values. | |
2935 | |
2936 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
2937 | |
2938 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
2939 outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
2940 | |
2941 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
2942 `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
2943 | |
2944 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
2945 | |
2946 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
2947 re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
2948 | |
2949 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
2950 | |
2951 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
2952 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
2953 | |
2954 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
2955 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
2956 | |
2957 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
2958 control over simplification. | |
2959 | |
2960 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
2961 | |
2962 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
2963 limit. | |
2964 | |
2965 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
2966 | |
2967 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
2968 | |
26264 | 2969 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
25853 | 2970 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
2971 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
2972 | |
2973 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix | |
2974 `a' forces normal posting method. | |
2975 | |
2976 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
2977 -- `W d'. | |
2978 | |
2979 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
2980 to a non-nil value. | |
2981 | |
2982 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
2983 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
2984 | |
2985 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
2986 has been added. | |
2987 | |
2988 *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
2989 | |
2990 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
2991 | |
2992 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
2993 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
2994 | |
2995 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
2996 `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
2997 | |
2998 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
2999 | |
3000 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
3001 been added. | |
3002 | |
3003 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
3004 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
3005 | |
3006 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
3007 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
3008 | |
3009 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
3010 | |
3011 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
3012 | |
3013 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
3014 | |
3015 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
3016 | |
3017 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
3018 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
3019 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
3020 | |
3021 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
3022 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
3023 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
3024 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
3025 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
3026 | |
3027 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
3028 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
3029 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
3030 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
3031 | |
3032 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
3033 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
3034 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
3035 mismatch. | |
3036 | |
3037 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
3038 | |
3039 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
3040 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
3041 | |
3042 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
3043 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
3044 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
3045 removed from the label. | |
3046 | |
3047 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
3048 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
3049 | |
3050 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
3051 customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
3052 | |
3053 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
3054 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
26264 | 3055 expressions. |
25853 | 3056 |
3057 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
3058 | |
3059 ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
3060 | |
3061 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
3062 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
3063 | |
3064 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
3065 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
3066 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
3067 | |
3068 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
3069 changes with a special face. | |
3070 | |
3071 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
3072 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
3073 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
3074 | |
3075 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
3076 | |
3077 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
3078 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
3079 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
3080 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
3081 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
3082 | |
3083 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
3084 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
3085 distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
3086 | |
3087 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
3088 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
3089 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
3090 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
3091 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
3092 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
3093 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
3094 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
3095 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
3096 | |
3097 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
3098 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
3099 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
3100 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
3101 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
3102 program. | |
3103 | |
3104 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
3105 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
3106 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
3107 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
3108 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
3109 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
3110 | |
3111 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
3112 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
3113 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
3114 was not documented clearly before. | |
3115 | |
3116 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
3117 This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
3118 | |
3119 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
3120 | |
3121 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
3122 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
3123 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
3124 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
3125 | |
3126 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
3127 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
3128 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
3129 | |
3130 ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
3131 | |
3132 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
3133 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
3134 | |
3135 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
3136 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
3137 integers. | |
3138 | |
3139 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
3140 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
3141 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
3142 file names and attributes are returned. | |
3143 | |
3144 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
3145 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
3146 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes. | |
3147 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and | |
3148 returns the result. | |
3149 | |
3150 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
3151 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
3152 | |
3153 ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
3154 | |
3155 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
3156 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
3157 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
3158 optionally. | |
3159 | |
3160 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
3161 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
3162 | |
3163 ** | |
3164 The new function process-running-child-p | |
3165 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
3166 terminal to its own child process. | |
3167 | |
3168 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
3169 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
3170 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
3171 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
3172 | |
3173 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
3174 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
3175 | |
3176 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
3177 :included is an alias for :visible. | |
3178 | |
3179 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
3180 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
3181 to move or copy menu entries. | |
3182 | |
3183 ** Multibyte editing changes | |
3184 | |
3185 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
3186 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
3187 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
3188 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
3189 char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
3190 (setq char (sref str idx) | |
3191 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
3192 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
3193 | |
3194 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
3195 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
3196 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
3197 | |
3198 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
3199 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
3200 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
3201 | |
3202 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted | |
3203 | |
3204 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
3205 across the boundary. | |
3206 | |
3207 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
3208 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
3209 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
3210 contains 8-bit characters. | |
3211 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
3212 contains invalid characters. | |
3213 | |
3214 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
3215 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
3216 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
3217 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
3218 way. | |
3219 | |
3220 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
3221 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
3222 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
3223 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
3224 | |
3225 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
3226 compose Thai characters in a string. | |
3227 | |
3228 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
3229 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
3230 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
3231 menus should always use the third argument. | |
3232 | |
3233 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
3234 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
3235 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
3236 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
3237 | |
3238 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
3239 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
3240 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
3241 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
3242 | |
3243 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
3244 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
3245 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
3246 echo area contents. | |
3247 | |
3248 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
3249 | |
3250 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
3251 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
3252 requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
3253 | |
3254 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
3255 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
26264 | 3256 means to clear out that attribute. |
25853 | 3257 |
3258 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
3259 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
3260 | |
3261 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
3262 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
3263 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
3264 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
3265 | |
3266 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
3267 the gap of the current buffer. | |
3268 | |
3269 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
3270 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
3271 current buffer. | |
3272 | |
3273 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
3274 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
3275 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
3276 it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
3277 | |
3278 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
3279 | |
3280 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
3281 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
3282 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
3283 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
3284 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
3285 | |
3286 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
3287 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
3288 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
3289 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
3290 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
3291 | |
3292 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
3293 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
3294 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
3295 | |
3296 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
3297 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
3298 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
3299 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
3300 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
3301 results. | |
3302 | |
3303 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
3304 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
3305 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
3306 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
3307 | |
3308 * Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
3309 | |
3310 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
3311 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
3312 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
3313 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
3314 | |
3315 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
3316 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
3317 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
3318 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
3319 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
3320 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
3321 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
3322 region. | |
3323 | |
3324 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
3325 selective undo. | |
3326 | |
3327 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
3328 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
3329 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
3330 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
3331 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
3332 | |
3333 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
3334 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
3335 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
3336 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
3337 | |
3338 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
3339 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
3340 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
3341 something that most users not do. | |
3342 | |
3343 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
3344 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
3345 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
3346 applications. | |
3347 | |
3348 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
3349 pasting operations. | |
3350 | |
3351 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
3352 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
3353 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
3354 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
3355 `ps-printer-name'. | |
3356 | |
3357 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
3358 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
3359 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
3360 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
3361 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
3362 hits a new word. | |
3363 | |
3364 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
3365 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
3366 to be confused by TeX commands. | |
3367 | |
3368 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
3369 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
3370 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
3371 of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
3372 | |
3373 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
3374 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
3375 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
3376 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
3377 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
3378 | |
3379 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
3380 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
3381 | |
3382 ** Changes in input method usage. | |
3383 | |
3384 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
3385 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
3386 respectively. | |
3387 | |
3388 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
3389 | |
3390 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
3391 of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
3392 | |
3393 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
3394 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
3395 | |
3396 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
3397 | |
3398 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
3399 | |
3400 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
3401 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
3402 | |
3403 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
26264 | 3404 given in the following case: |
25853 | 3405 o When you are using a complex input method. |
3406 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
3407 | |
3408 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
3409 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
3410 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
3411 setting it to t is helpful. | |
3412 | |
3413 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
3414 | |
3415 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
3416 keys: | |
3417 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
3418 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
3419 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
3420 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
3421 environment. | |
3422 | |
3423 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
3424 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
3425 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
3426 get | |
3427 | |
3428 /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
3429 | |
3430 which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
3431 | |
3432 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
3433 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
3434 | |
3435 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
3436 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
3437 its owner and group. | |
3438 | |
3439 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
3440 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
3441 | |
3442 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
3443 contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
3444 | |
3445 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
3446 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
3447 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
3448 by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
3449 | |
3450 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
3451 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
3452 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
3453 for writing keyboard macros. | |
3454 | |
3455 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
3456 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
3457 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
3458 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
3459 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
3460 info. | |
3461 | |
3462 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
3463 | |
3464 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
3465 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
3466 contents only. | |
3467 | |
3468 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
3469 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
3470 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
3471 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
3472 | |
3473 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
3474 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
3475 literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
3476 | |
3477 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
3478 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
3479 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
3480 inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
3481 | |
3482 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
3483 failure if the command produces no output. | |
3484 | |
3485 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
3486 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
3487 the mouse. | |
3488 | |
3489 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
3490 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
3491 function and variable names. | |
3492 | |
3493 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
3494 reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
3495 file-coding-system-alist. | |
3496 | |
3497 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
3498 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
3499 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
3500 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
3501 according to the current fontset. | |
3502 | |
3503 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
3504 | |
3505 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
3506 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
3507 nonascii-insert-offset. | |
3508 | |
3509 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
3510 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
3511 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
3512 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
3513 | |
3514 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
3515 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
3516 | |
3517 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
3518 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
3519 | |
3520 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
3521 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
3522 command keys. | |
3523 | |
3524 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
3525 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
3526 | |
3527 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
3528 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
3529 all variables that have documentation. | |
3530 | |
3531 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
3532 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
3533 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
3534 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
3535 it should show; the default is 20. | |
3536 | |
3537 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
3538 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
3539 of your input. | |
3540 | |
3541 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
3542 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
3543 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
3544 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
3545 the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
3546 Newly added options are included as well. | |
3547 | |
3548 If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
3549 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
3550 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
3551 | |
3552 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
3553 Customize menu. | |
3554 | |
3555 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
3556 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
3557 | |
3558 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
3559 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
3560 invoked. | |
3561 | |
3562 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
3563 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
3564 The default is 1. | |
3565 | |
3566 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
3567 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
3568 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
3569 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
3570 sensibly. | |
3571 | |
3572 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
3573 | |
3574 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
3575 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
3576 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
3577 | |
3578 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
3579 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
3580 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
3581 every night. | |
3582 | |
3583 ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
3584 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
3585 | |
3586 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
3587 read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
3588 | |
3589 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
3590 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
3591 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
3592 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
3593 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
26264 | 3594 made invisible again. |
25853 | 3595 |
3596 ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
3597 | |
3598 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
3599 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
3600 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
3601 toggle. | |
3602 | |
3603 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
3604 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
3605 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
3606 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
3607 rmail-default-body-file. | |
3608 | |
3609 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
3610 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
3611 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
3612 | |
3613 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
3614 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
3615 is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
3616 | |
3617 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
3618 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
3619 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
3620 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
3621 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
3622 especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
3623 | |
3624 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
3625 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
3626 provided by feedmail are: | |
3627 | |
3628 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
3629 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
3630 there is also a queue for draft messages | |
3631 | |
3632 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
3633 be prompted for confirmation | |
3634 | |
3635 **** does smart filling of address headers | |
3636 | |
3637 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
3638 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
3639 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
3640 | |
3641 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
3642 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
3643 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
3644 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
3645 | |
3646 ** Dired changes | |
3647 | |
3648 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
3649 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
3650 | |
3651 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
3652 run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
3653 | |
3654 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
3655 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
3656 for a specified regexp. | |
3657 | |
3658 ** VC Changes | |
3659 | |
3660 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
3661 conveniently. | |
3662 | |
3663 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
3664 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
3665 Dired. | |
3666 | |
3667 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
3668 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
3669 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
3670 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
3671 | |
3672 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
3673 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
3674 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
3675 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
3676 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
3677 | |
3678 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
3679 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
3680 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
3681 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
3682 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
3683 | |
3684 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
3685 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
26264 | 3686 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
25853 | 3687 `* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
3688 | |
3689 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
3690 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
3691 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
3692 | |
3693 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
3694 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
3695 session to resolve them. | |
3696 | |
3697 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
3698 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
3699 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
3700 uses as well). | |
3701 | |
3702 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
3703 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
3704 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
3705 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
3706 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
3707 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
3708 using ediff. | |
3709 | |
3710 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
3711 | |
3712 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
3713 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
3714 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
3715 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
3716 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
3717 | |
3718 ** Frame name display changes | |
3719 | |
3720 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
3721 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
3722 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
3723 when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
3724 | |
3725 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
3726 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
3727 menu. | |
3728 | |
3729 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
3730 | |
3731 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
3732 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
3733 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
3734 | |
3735 *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
3736 | |
3737 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
3738 that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
3739 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
3740 | |
3741 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
3742 send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
3743 the following line. | |
3744 | |
3745 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
3746 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
3747 previously sent input. | |
3748 | |
3749 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
3750 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
3751 as the search string. | |
3752 | |
3753 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
3754 automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
3755 | |
3756 ** C mode changes | |
3757 | |
3758 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
3759 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
3760 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
26264 | 3761 definition. |
25853 | 3762 |
3763 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
3764 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
3765 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
3766 style is still the default however. | |
3767 | |
3768 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
3769 | |
3770 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
3771 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
3772 them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
3773 | |
3774 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
3775 and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
3776 | |
3777 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
3778 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
3779 | |
3780 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
3781 makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
3782 | |
3783 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
3784 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
3785 | |
3786 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
3787 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
3788 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
3789 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
3790 | |
3791 ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
3792 | |
26264 | 3793 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
25853 | 3794 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
3795 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
3796 | |
3797 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
3798 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
3799 expanding dynamically. | |
3800 | |
3801 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
3802 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
3803 | |
3804 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
3805 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
3806 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
3807 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
3808 | |
3809 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
3810 | |
3811 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
3812 | |
3813 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
3814 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
3815 automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
3816 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
3817 against the first word in the title. | |
3818 | |
3819 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
3820 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
3821 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
26264 | 3822 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
25853 | 3823 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
26264 | 3824 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
25853 | 3825 |
3826 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
3827 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
3828 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
3829 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
3830 | |
3831 ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
3832 | |
3833 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
3834 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
3835 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
3836 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
3837 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
3838 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
3839 | |
3840 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
3841 Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
3842 | |
3843 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
3844 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
3845 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour. | |
3846 | |
3847 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
3848 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
3849 | |
3850 ** Ispell changes. | |
3851 | |
26264 | 3852 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
3853 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
25853 | 3854 are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
3855 | |
3856 *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
3857 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
3858 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
3859 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
26264 | 3860 include: |
25853 | 3861 |
3862 o URLs are automatically skipped | |
3863 o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
3864 | |
3865 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
3866 | |
3867 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
3868 | |
3869 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
3870 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
3871 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
3872 section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
3873 | |
3874 *** New recursive parser. | |
3875 | |
3876 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
3877 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
3878 recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
3879 | |
3880 *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
26264 | 3881 |
25853 | 3882 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
3883 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
3884 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
3885 | |
3886 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
3887 | |
3888 *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
3889 | |
3890 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
3891 | |
3892 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
3893 | |
3894 *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
3895 | |
3896 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
3897 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
3898 | |
3899 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
3900 | |
3901 *** References to external documents. | |
3902 | |
3903 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
3904 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
3905 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
3906 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
3907 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
3908 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
3909 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
3910 | |
3911 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
3912 | |
3913 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, | |
3914 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. | |
3915 | |
3916 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
3917 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
3918 | |
3919 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
3920 | |
3921 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
3922 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
3923 | |
3924 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
3925 | |
3926 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
3927 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
3928 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
3929 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
3930 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
3931 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
3932 more. | |
3933 | |
3934 *** Support for the varioref package | |
3935 | |
3936 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
3937 | |
3938 *** New hooks | |
3939 | |
3940 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
3941 and citations are created. These hooks are | |
3942 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
3943 `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
3944 | |
3945 *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
3946 | |
3947 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
3948 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
3949 | |
3950 *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
3951 | |
3952 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
3953 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
3954 fontified, use | |
3955 | |
3956 (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
3957 | |
3958 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
3959 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
3960 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
3961 directories that contain the same file name. | |
3962 | |
3963 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
3964 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
3965 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
3966 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
3967 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
3968 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
3969 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
3970 directory. | |
3971 | |
3972 ** New modes and packages | |
3973 | |
3974 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
3975 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
3976 it, but some do not. | |
3977 | |
3978 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
3979 code. | |
3980 | |
3981 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
3982 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
3983 around in a buffer. | |
3984 | |
3985 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
3986 | |
3987 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
3988 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
3989 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
3990 established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
3991 | |
3992 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
3993 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
3994 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
3995 | |
3996 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
3997 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
3998 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
3999 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
4000 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
4001 the like. | |
4002 | |
4003 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
4004 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
4005 | |
4006 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
4007 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
4008 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
4009 the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
4010 | |
4011 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
4012 | |
4013 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
4014 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
4015 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
4016 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
4017 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
4018 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
4019 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
4020 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
4021 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
4022 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
4023 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
4024 | |
4025 Platform-specific modes: | |
4026 | |
4027 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
4028 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
4029 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
4030 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
4031 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
4032 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
4033 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
4034 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
4035 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
4036 | |
4037 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
4038 | |
4039 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
4040 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
4041 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
4042 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
4043 | |
4044 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
4045 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
4046 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
4047 | |
4048 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
4049 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
4050 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
4051 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
4052 | |
4053 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
4054 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
4055 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
4056 environment. | |
4057 | |
4058 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
4059 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
4060 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
4061 current input method for reading this one event. | |
4062 | |
4063 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
4064 now control whether to output certain characters as | |
4065 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
4066 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
4067 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
4068 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
4069 | |
4070 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
4071 | |
4072 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
4073 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
4074 | |
4075 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
4076 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
4077 always increases point by 1. | |
4078 | |
4079 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
4080 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
4081 | |
4082 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
4083 | |
4084 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
4085 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
4086 default value changed. For example, | |
4087 | |
4088 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
4089 :type 'integer | |
4090 :group 'foo | |
4091 :version "20.3") | |
4092 | |
26264 | 4093 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
25853 | 4094 :version "20.3") |
4095 | |
4096 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
4097 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
4098 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
4099 `:version' in the top level group. | |
4100 | |
4101 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
4102 | |
4103 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
4104 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
4105 | |
4106 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
4107 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
4108 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
4109 to themselves. | |
4110 | |
4111 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
4112 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
4113 values whatever. | |
4114 | |
4115 ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
4116 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
4117 in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
4118 | |
4119 ** Frame-local variables. | |
4120 | |
4121 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
4122 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
4123 local bindings for that variable. | |
4124 | |
4125 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
4126 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
4127 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
4128 parameter name. | |
4129 | |
4130 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
4131 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
4132 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
4133 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
4134 | |
4135 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
4136 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
4137 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
4138 through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
4139 | |
4140 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
4141 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
4142 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
4143 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
4144 See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
4145 | |
4146 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
4147 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
4148 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
4149 The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
4150 | |
4151 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
4152 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
4153 | |
4154 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
4155 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
4156 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
4157 | |
4158 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
4159 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
4160 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
4161 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
4162 | |
4163 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
4164 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
4165 empty input. | |
4166 | |
4167 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
4168 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
4169 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
4170 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
4171 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
4172 | |
4173 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
4174 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
4175 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
4176 default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
4177 | |
4178 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
4179 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
4180 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
4181 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
4182 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
4183 | |
4184 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
4185 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
4186 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
4187 end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
4188 | |
4189 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
4190 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
4191 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
4192 | |
4193 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
4194 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
4195 was directed to display this buffer. | |
4196 | |
4197 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
4198 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
4199 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
4200 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
4201 set-window-configuration. | |
4202 | |
4203 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
4204 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
4205 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
4206 windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
4207 | |
4208 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
4209 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
4210 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
4211 | |
4212 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
4213 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
4214 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
4215 | |
4216 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
4217 and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
4218 | |
4219 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
4220 except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
4221 | |
4222 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
4223 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
4224 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
4225 | |
4226 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
4227 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
4228 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
4229 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
4230 | |
4231 ** Menu changes | |
4232 | |
4233 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
4234 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
4235 better supported. | |
4236 | |
4237 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
4238 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
4239 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
4240 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
4241 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
4242 | |
4243 *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
4244 | |
4245 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
4246 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
4247 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
4248 starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
4249 | |
4250 The format is: | |
4251 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
4252 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
4253 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
4254 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
4255 The supported properties include | |
4256 | |
4257 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
4258 item is enabled. | |
4259 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
4260 item should appear in the menu. | |
26264 | 4261 :filter FILTER-FN |
25853 | 4262 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
4263 which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
4264 It should return a binding to use instead. | |
4265 :keys DESCRIPTION | |
4266 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
4267 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with | |
4268 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. | |
4269 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
4270 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
4271 keyboard binding. | |
4272 :key-sequence nil | |
4273 This means that the command normally has no | |
4274 keyboard equivalent. | |
4275 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
4276 :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
4277 TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
4278 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
4279 value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
4280 | |
4281 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
4282 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
4283 | |
4284 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
4285 | |
4286 ** New event types | |
4287 | |
4288 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
4289 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
4290 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
4291 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
4292 | |
4293 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
4294 | |
4295 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
4296 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
4297 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
4298 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
4299 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
4300 forward, away from the user. | |
4301 | |
4302 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
4303 | |
4304 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
4305 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
4306 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
4307 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
4308 loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
4309 | |
4310 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
4311 | |
4312 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
4313 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
4314 that were dragged and dropped. | |
4315 | |
4316 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
4317 | |
4318 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
4319 | |
4320 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
4321 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
4322 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
4323 | |
4324 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
4325 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
4326 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
4327 | |
4328 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
4329 in Emacs 19 and before. | |
4330 | |
4331 The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
4332 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
4333 | |
4334 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
4335 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
4336 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
4337 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
4338 | |
4339 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
4340 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
4341 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
4342 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
4343 will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
4344 | |
4345 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
4346 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
4347 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
4348 consistent with the new representation. | |
4349 | |
4350 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
4351 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
4352 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
4353 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
4354 | |
4355 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
4356 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
4357 using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
4358 | |
4359 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
4360 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
4361 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
4362 | |
4363 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
4364 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
4365 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
4366 | |
4367 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
4368 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
4369 | |
4370 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
4371 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
4372 | |
4373 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
4374 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
4375 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
4376 You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
4377 | |
4378 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
4379 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
4380 | |
4381 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
4382 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
4383 buffer or string being searched. | |
4384 | |
4385 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
4386 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
4387 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
4388 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
4389 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
4390 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
4391 expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
4392 | |
4393 *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
4394 | |
4395 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
4396 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
4397 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
4398 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
4399 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
4400 your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
4401 define-coding-system-alias. | |
4402 | |
4403 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
4404 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
4405 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
4406 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
4407 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
4408 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
4409 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
4410 `iso-8859-1'. | |
4411 | |
4412 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
4413 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
4414 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
4415 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
4416 | |
4417 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
4418 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
4419 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
4420 the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
4421 | |
4422 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
4423 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
4424 This function requires a user interaction. | |
4425 | |
4426 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
4427 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
4428 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
4429 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
4430 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
4431 select-safe-coding-system. | |
4432 | |
4433 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
4434 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
4435 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
4436 was done. | |
4437 | |
4438 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
4439 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
4440 coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
4441 | |
4442 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
4443 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
4444 characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
4445 `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
4446 | |
4447 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
4448 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
4449 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
4450 converted. | |
4451 | |
4452 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
4453 coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
4454 | |
4455 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
4456 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
4457 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
4458 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
4459 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
4460 range of characters. | |
4461 | |
4462 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
4463 Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
4464 | |
4465 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
4466 in the current buffer at position POS. | |
4467 | |
4468 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
4469 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
4470 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
4471 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
4472 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
4473 binding input-method-function to nil. | |
4474 | |
4475 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
4476 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
4477 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
4478 the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
4479 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
4480 | |
4481 The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
4482 subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
4483 | |
4484 *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
4485 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
4486 | |
4487 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
4488 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
4489 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
4490 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
4491 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
4492 | |
4493 * Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
4494 | |
4495 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
4496 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
4497 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
4498 tree structure. | |
4499 | |
4500 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
4501 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
4502 | |
4503 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
4504 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
4505 in your .emacs file.) | |
4506 | |
4507 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
4508 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
4509 | |
4510 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
4511 This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
4512 | |
4513 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
4514 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
4515 kills the region. | |
4516 | |
4517 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
4518 delete the character before point, as usual. | |
4519 | |
4520 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
4521 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
4522 by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
4523 | |
4524 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
4525 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
4526 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
4527 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
4528 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
4529 past.) | |
4530 | |
4531 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
4532 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
4533 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
4534 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
4535 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
4536 | |
4537 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
4538 and is an alias for it. | |
4539 | |
4540 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
4541 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
4542 | |
4543 ** Scrolling changes | |
4544 | |
4545 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
4546 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
4547 | |
4548 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
4549 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
4550 where it started. | |
4551 | |
4552 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
4553 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
4554 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
4555 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
4556 | |
4557 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
4558 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
4559 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
4560 recenters the window. | |
4561 | |
4562 ** International character set support (MULE) | |
4563 | |
4564 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
4565 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
4566 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
4567 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
4568 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
4569 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
4570 | |
4571 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
4572 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
4573 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
4574 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
4575 into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
4576 | |
4577 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
4578 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
4579 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
4580 language, to make it possible to type them. | |
4581 | |
4582 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
4583 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
4584 | |
4585 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
4586 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
4587 | |
4588 You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
4589 | |
4590 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
4591 | |
4592 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
4593 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
4594 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
4595 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
4596 characters for their work until they want to change. | |
4597 | |
4598 *** Input methods | |
4599 | |
4600 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
4601 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
4602 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
4603 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
4604 support several input methods. | |
4605 | |
4606 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
4607 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
4608 work. | |
4609 | |
4610 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
4611 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
4612 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
4613 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
4614 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
4615 letter. | |
4616 | |
4617 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
4618 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
4619 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
4620 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
4621 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
4622 | |
4623 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
4624 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
4625 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
4626 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
4627 | |
4628 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
4629 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
4630 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
4631 the first guess is wrong. | |
4632 | |
4633 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
4634 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
4635 | |
4636 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
4637 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
4638 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
4639 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
4640 | |
4641 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
4642 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
4643 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
4644 translate automatically to and from either one. | |
4645 | |
4646 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
4647 | |
4648 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
4649 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
4650 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
4651 what you want. | |
4652 | |
4653 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
4654 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
4655 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
4656 multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
4657 | |
4658 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
4659 character conversion as well. | |
4660 | |
4661 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
4662 | |
4663 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
4664 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
4665 requires using many fonts. | |
4666 | |
4667 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
4668 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
4669 | |
4670 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
4671 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
4672 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
4673 you would use a font. | |
4674 | |
4675 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
4676 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
4677 display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
4678 | |
4679 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
4680 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
4681 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
4682 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
4683 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
4684 | |
4685 *** Defining fontsets. | |
4686 | |
4687 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
4688 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
4689 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
4690 | |
4691 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
4692 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
4693 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
4694 standard fontset are created automatically. | |
4695 | |
4696 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
4697 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
4698 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
4699 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
4700 name is `fontset-startup'. | |
4701 | |
4702 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
4703 The resource value should have this form: | |
4704 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
4705 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
4706 * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
4707 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
4708 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
4709 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
4710 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
4711 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and | |
4712 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
4713 | |
4714 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
4715 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
4716 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
4717 | |
4718 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
4719 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
4720 following resource, | |
4721 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
4722 the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
4723 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
4724 Here is the substitution rule: | |
4725 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
4726 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
4727 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
4728 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
4729 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
4730 | |
4731 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
4732 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
4733 that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
4734 | |
4735 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
4736 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
4737 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
4738 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
4739 fontsets. | |
4740 | |
4741 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
4742 defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
4743 | |
4744 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
4745 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
4746 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
4747 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
4748 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
4749 system for new files that you create. | |
4750 | |
4751 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
4752 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
4753 whole Emacs session. | |
4754 | |
4755 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
4756 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
4757 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
4758 | |
4759 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
4760 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
4761 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
4762 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
4763 coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
4764 | |
4765 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
4766 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
4767 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
4768 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
4769 is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
4770 | |
4771 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
4772 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
4773 | |
4774 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
4775 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
4776 | |
4777 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
4778 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
4779 | |
4780 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
4781 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
4782 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
4783 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
4784 of the file. | |
4785 | |
4786 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
4787 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
4788 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
4789 translated into that character code. | |
4790 | |
4791 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
4792 various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
4793 | |
4794 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
4795 | |
4796 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
4797 the coding system for keyboard input. | |
4798 | |
4799 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
4800 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
4801 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
4802 | |
4803 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
4804 | |
4805 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
4806 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
4807 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
4808 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
4809 designed to work with terminals. | |
4810 | |
4811 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
4812 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
4813 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
4814 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
4815 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
4816 in the corresponding buffer. | |
4817 | |
4818 By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
4819 | |
4820 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
4821 to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
4822 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
4823 | |
4824 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
4825 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
4826 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
4827 want to use. | |
4828 | |
4829 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
4830 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
4831 | |
4832 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
4833 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
4834 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
4835 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
4836 | |
4837 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
4838 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
4839 related information. | |
4840 | |
4841 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
4842 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
4843 scripts. | |
4844 | |
4845 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
4846 information about the support for a particular language. | |
4847 You specify the language as an argument. | |
4848 | |
4849 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
4850 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
4851 first dash. | |
4852 | |
4853 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
4854 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
4855 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
4856 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
4857 | |
4858 A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
4859 B big5 (Chinese) | |
4860 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
4861 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
4862 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
4863 E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
4864 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
4865 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
4866 K euc-korea (Korean) | |
4867 R koi8 (Russian) | |
4868 Q tibetan | |
4869 S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
4870 T lao | |
4871 T tis620 (Thai) | |
4872 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
4873 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
4874 k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
4875 v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
4876 z hz (Chinese) | |
4877 | |
4878 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
4879 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
4880 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
4881 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
4882 | |
4883 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
4884 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
4885 | |
4886 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
4887 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
4888 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
4889 Rmail files themselves. | |
4890 | |
4891 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
4892 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
4893 | |
4894 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
4895 for sending mail: | |
4896 | |
4897 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
4898 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
4899 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
4900 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
4901 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
4902 | |
4903 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
4904 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
4905 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
4906 translations. | |
4907 | |
4908 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
4909 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
4910 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
4911 without any conversion. | |
4912 | |
4913 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
4914 You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
4915 RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
4916 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
4917 | |
4918 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
4919 functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
4920 | |
4921 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
4922 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
4923 | |
4924 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
4925 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
4926 | |
4927 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
4928 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
4929 in the buffer before point. | |
4930 | |
4931 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
4932 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
4933 you are using. | |
4934 | |
4935 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
4936 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
4937 | |
4938 ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
4939 | |
4940 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
4941 in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
4942 | |
4943 This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
4944 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
4945 can become a bottleneck. | |
4946 | |
4947 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
4948 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
4949 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
4950 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
4951 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
4952 so useful that the change is worth while. | |
4953 | |
4954 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
4955 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
4956 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
4957 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
4958 | |
4959 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
4960 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
4961 show-paren-mode. | |
4962 | |
4963 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
4964 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
4965 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
4966 | |
4967 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
4968 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
4969 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
4970 | |
4971 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
4972 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
4973 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
4974 | |
4975 ** Changes in View mode. | |
4976 | |
4977 *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
4978 Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
4979 | |
4980 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
4981 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
4982 | |
4983 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
4984 previous state. | |
4985 | |
4986 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
4987 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
4988 | |
4989 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
4990 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
4991 not just the selected window. | |
4992 | |
4993 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
4994 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
4995 turns View mode on or off. | |
4996 | |
4997 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
4998 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
4999 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
5000 | |
5001 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
5002 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
5003 | |
5004 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
5005 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
5006 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
5007 which version to compare with. | |
5008 | |
5009 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
26264 | 5010 blocks if a match is inside the block. |
25853 | 5011 |
5012 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
5013 is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
5014 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
5015 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
5016 | |
5017 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
5018 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
5019 blocks, all of them or none. | |
5020 | |
5021 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
5022 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
5023 confirmation first. | |
5024 | |
5025 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
5026 now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
5027 However, the mode will not be changed if | |
5028 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
5029 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
5030 not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
5031 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
5032 | |
5033 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
5034 | |
5035 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
5036 these commands do not change the major mode. | |
5037 | |
5038 ** M-x occur changes. | |
5039 | |
5040 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
5041 it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
5042 | |
5043 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
5044 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
5045 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
5046 | |
5047 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
5048 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
5049 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
5050 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
5051 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
5052 | |
5053 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
5054 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
5055 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
5056 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
5057 | |
5058 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
5059 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
5060 buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
5061 | |
5062 ** Outline mode changes. | |
5063 | |
5064 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
5065 | |
5066 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
5067 | |
5068 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
5069 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
5070 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
5071 was already active. | |
5072 | |
5073 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
5074 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
5075 get confused by it. | |
5076 | |
5077 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
5078 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
5079 | |
5080 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
5081 | |
5082 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
5083 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
5084 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
5085 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
5086 | |
5087 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
5088 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
5089 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
5090 | |
5091 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
5092 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
5093 values. | |
5094 | |
5095 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
5096 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
5097 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
5098 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
5099 | |
5100 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
5101 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
5102 can be. The default value is 30. | |
5103 | |
5104 ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
5105 | |
5106 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
5107 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
5108 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
5109 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
5110 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
5111 behavior. | |
5112 | |
5113 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
5114 compose-mail-other-frame. | |
5115 | |
5116 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
5117 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
5118 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
5119 buffer that shows the original message. | |
5120 | |
5121 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
5122 with separator lines around the contents. | |
5123 | |
5124 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
5125 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
5126 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
5127 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
5128 | |
5129 *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
5130 | |
5131 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
5132 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
5133 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
5134 Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
5135 | |
5136 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
5137 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
5138 /etc/passwd. | |
5139 | |
5140 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
5141 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
5142 /etc/passwd. | |
5143 | |
5144 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
5145 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
5146 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
5147 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
5148 | |
5149 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
5150 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
5151 be taken to be magic. | |
5152 | |
5153 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
5154 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
5155 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
5156 | |
5157 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
5158 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
5159 | |
5160 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
5161 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
5162 | |
5163 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
5164 | |
5165 new key dired.el binding old key | |
5166 ------- ---------------- ------- | |
5167 * c dired-change-marks c | |
5168 * m dired-mark m | |
5169 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
5170 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
5171 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
5172 * u dired-unmark u | |
5173 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
5174 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
5175 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
5176 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
5177 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
5178 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
5179 | |
5180 ** Rmail changes. | |
5181 | |
5182 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
5183 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
5184 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
5185 each time you run it. | |
5186 | |
5187 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
5188 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
5189 | |
5190 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
5191 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
5192 means to move in the opposite direction. | |
5193 | |
5194 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
5195 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
5196 | |
5197 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
5198 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
5199 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
5200 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
5201 for output. | |
5202 | |
5203 ** Gnus changes. | |
5204 | |
5205 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
5206 | |
26264 | 5207 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
5208 Gnus. | |
5209 | |
5210 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
25853 | 5211 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
5212 | |
5213 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
5214 article mode line. | |
5215 | |
5216 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
5217 | |
5218 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
5219 | |
5220 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
5221 | |
5222 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
5223 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
5224 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
5225 | |
5226 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
5227 | |
5228 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
5229 | |
5230 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
5231 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
5232 | |
5233 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
5234 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
5235 used to pick articles. | |
5236 | |
5237 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
5238 another have been added. | |
5239 | |
5240 `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
5241 | |
5242 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
5243 generating lines in buffers. | |
5244 | |
5245 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
5246 `M-C-_'. | |
5247 | |
5248 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
5249 | |
5250 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
5251 | |
5252 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
5253 | |
5254 *** Scores can be decayed. | |
26264 | 5255 |
25853 | 5256 (setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
5257 | |
5258 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
5259 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
5260 | |
5261 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
5262 the native server. | |
5263 | |
5264 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
5265 | |
5266 *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
5267 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
5268 | |
5269 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
5270 | |
5271 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
5272 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
5273 | |
5274 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
5275 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
5276 | |
5277 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
5278 a group. | |
5279 | |
5280 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
5281 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
5282 | |
5283 See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
5284 | |
5285 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
5286 | |
5287 See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
5288 | |
5289 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
26264 | 5290 |
25853 | 5291 Use the `Y c' command. |
5292 | |
5293 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
5294 | |
5295 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
5296 | |
5297 `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
5298 | |
5299 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
5300 from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
26264 | 5301 |
25853 | 5302 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
5303 | |
5304 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
5305 | |
5306 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
5307 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
5308 | |
5309 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
5310 | |
5311 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
5312 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
5313 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
5314 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
5315 this issue.) | |
5316 | |
5317 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
5318 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
5319 particular news group. This can be done by: | |
5320 | |
5321 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
5322 | |
5323 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
5324 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
5325 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
5326 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
5327 for reading and posting). | |
5328 | |
5329 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
5330 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
5331 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
5332 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
5333 there. | |
5334 | |
5335 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
5336 default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
5337 | |
5338 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
5339 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
5340 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
5341 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
5342 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
5343 | |
5344 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
5345 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
5346 | |
5347 ** CC mode changes. | |
5348 | |
5349 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
5350 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
5351 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
5352 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
5353 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
5354 loaded. | |
5355 | |
5356 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
26264 | 5357 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
25853 | 5358 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
26264 | 5359 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
5360 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
25853 | 5361 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
5362 | |
5363 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
5364 of the current buffer. | |
5365 | |
5366 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
5367 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
5368 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
5369 | |
5370 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
5371 style that the Python developers like. | |
5372 | |
5373 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
5374 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
5375 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
5376 | |
5377 ** VC Changes [new] | |
5378 | |
5379 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | |
5380 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | |
5381 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
5382 | |
5383 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
5384 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
5385 developers. | |
5386 | |
5387 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
5388 RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
5389 | |
5390 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
5391 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
5392 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
5393 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
5394 | |
5395 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
5396 version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
5397 | |
5398 ** Calendar changes. | |
5399 | |
5400 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses | |
5401 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this | |
5402 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. | |
5403 | |
5404 ** ps-print changes | |
5405 | |
26264 | 5406 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. |
25853 | 5407 |
5408 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | |
5409 | |
5410 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | |
5411 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | |
5412 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | |
5413 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | |
5414 It defaults to `letter'. | |
5415 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | |
5416 | |
5417 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | |
26264 | 5418 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, |
25853 | 5419 non-nil means "landscape" mode. |
5420 | |
5421 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | |
5422 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | |
26264 | 5423 It defaults to 1. |
25853 | 5424 |
5425 *** Horizontal layout | |
5426 | |
5427 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | |
5428 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | |
5429 All are measured in points. | |
5430 | |
5431 *** Vertical layout | |
5432 | |
5433 The vertical layout is determined by the variables | |
5434 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | |
5435 All are measured in points. | |
5436 | |
5437 *** Headers | |
5438 | |
5439 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | |
5440 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | |
5441 margin above the text. | |
5442 | |
26264 | 5443 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy |
25853 | 5444 framing box is printed around the header. |
5445 | |
5446 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | |
5447 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | |
5448 | |
26264 | 5449 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', |
5450 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | |
25853 | 5451 `ps-header-font-size'. |
5452 | |
5453 *** Font managing | |
5454 | |
5455 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | |
5456 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | |
5457 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | |
5458 elements to this alist. | |
5459 | |
26264 | 5460 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font |
25853 | 5461 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. |
5462 | |
5463 ** hideshow changes. | |
5464 | |
5465 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
26264 | 5466 C++, ; for lisp). |
25853 | 5467 |
5468 *** Support for java-mode added. | |
5469 | |
5470 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
5471 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
5472 | |
5473 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at | |
5474 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your | |
5475 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
5476 | |
5477 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
5478 robust and a lot faster. | |
5479 | |
26264 | 5480 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
25853 | 5481 |
5482 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
5483 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
5484 documentation for more details. | |
5485 | |
5486 ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
5487 | |
5488 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
5489 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
5490 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
5491 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
5492 the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
5493 | |
5494 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
5495 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
5496 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
5497 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
5498 | |
5499 ** Font Lock mode | |
5500 | |
5501 *** Custom support | |
5502 | |
5503 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
5504 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
5505 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
5506 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
5507 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
5508 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
5509 | |
5510 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
5511 | |
5512 *** Maximum decoration | |
5513 | |
5514 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
5515 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
5516 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
5517 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
5518 to get the old behavior. | |
5519 | |
5520 *** New support | |
5521 | |
5522 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
5523 | |
5524 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
5525 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
5526 | |
5527 *** Configurable support | |
5528 | |
5529 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
5530 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
5531 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
5532 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
5533 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
5534 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
5535 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
5536 | |
5537 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
5538 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
5539 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
5540 | |
5541 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
5542 | |
5543 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
5544 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
5545 for any mode. | |
5546 | |
5547 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
5548 | |
5549 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
5550 | |
5551 in your ~/.emacs. | |
5552 | |
5553 *** New faces | |
5554 | |
5555 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
5556 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
5557 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
5558 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
5559 | |
5560 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
5561 | |
5562 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
5563 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
5564 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
5565 | |
5566 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
5567 | |
5568 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
5569 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
5570 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
5571 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
5572 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
5573 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
5574 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
5575 | |
5576 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
5577 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
5578 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
5579 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
5580 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
5581 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
5582 | |
5583 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
5584 | |
5585 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
5586 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
5587 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
5588 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
5589 | |
5590 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
5591 settings. | |
5592 | |
5593 ** Ada mode changes. | |
5594 | |
5595 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
5596 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
5597 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
5598 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
5599 stubs. | |
5600 | |
5601 *** There are two new commands: | |
5602 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
5603 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
5604 | |
5605 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
5606 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
26264 | 5607 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
25853 | 5608 |
5609 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
5610 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
5611 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
5612 | |
5613 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
5614 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
5615 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
5616 space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
5617 | |
5618 ** Scheme mode changes. | |
5619 | |
5620 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
5621 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
5622 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
5623 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
5624 have any effect. | |
5625 | |
5626 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
5627 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
5628 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
5629 variables as buffer-local variables. | |
5630 | |
5631 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
5632 Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
5633 | |
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5634 ** Changes to the emacsclient program |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5635 |
27475 | 5636 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or |
5637 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
5638 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
5639 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
5640 | |
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5641 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells |
25853 | 5642 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
5643 buffer in Emacs. | |
5644 | |
27307
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5645 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5646 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5647 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5648 option takes precedence. |
1d69cbf8a91e
emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27276
diff
changeset
|
5649 |
25853 | 5650 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
5651 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
5652 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
5653 | |
5654 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
5655 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
5656 the current defun. | |
5657 | |
5658 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
5659 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
5660 | |
5661 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
5662 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
5663 necessary). | |
5664 | |
5665 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
5666 if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
5667 these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
5668 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
5669 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
5670 it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
5671 | |
5672 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
5673 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
5674 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
5675 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
5676 | |
5677 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
5678 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
5679 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
5680 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
5681 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
5682 | |
5683 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
5684 since it applies only to the current frame. | |
5685 | |
5686 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
5687 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
5688 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
5689 | |
5690 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
5691 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
5692 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
5693 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
5694 instead of just the file you are editing. | |
5695 | |
5696 ** RefTeX mode | |
5697 | |
5698 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
5699 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
5700 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
5701 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
5702 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
5703 | |
26264 | 5704 C-c ( reftex-label |
25853 | 5705 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
5706 knows which kind of label is needed. | |
5707 | |
5708 C-c ) reftex-reference | |
5709 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
5710 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
5711 | |
5712 C-c [ reftex-citation | |
5713 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
5714 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
5715 | |
5716 C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
5717 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
5718 | |
5719 C-c = reftex-toc | |
5720 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
5721 can quickly jump to every section. | |
26264 | 5722 |
25853 | 5723 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
5724 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
5725 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
5726 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
5727 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
5728 | |
5729 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
5730 | |
5731 *** Info documentation is now available. | |
5732 | |
5733 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
5734 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
5735 | |
5736 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
5737 bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
5738 | |
5739 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
5740 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
5741 | |
5742 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
5743 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
5744 appropriate functions. | |
5745 | |
5746 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
5747 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
5748 | |
5749 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
5750 been cleaned. | |
5751 | |
5752 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
5753 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
5754 | |
5755 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
5756 shall be delimited. | |
5757 | |
5758 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
5759 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
5760 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
5761 | |
5762 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
5763 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
5764 prefixed with `ALT'. | |
5765 | |
5766 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
5767 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
5768 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
5769 documentation). | |
5770 | |
5771 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
5772 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
5773 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
5774 | |
5775 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
5776 comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
5777 | |
5778 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
5779 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
5780 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
5781 | |
5782 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
5783 | |
5784 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
5785 | |
5786 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
5787 from alien sources. | |
5788 | |
5789 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
5790 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
5791 crossref entries. | |
5792 | |
5793 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
5794 region. | |
5795 | |
5796 *** Added support for imenu. | |
5797 | |
5798 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
5799 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
5800 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
5801 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
5802 | |
5803 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
5804 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
5805 | |
5806 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
5807 | |
27136 | 5808 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. |
27112 | 5809 |
25853 | 5810 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
5811 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
5812 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
5813 as an argument. | |
5814 | |
5815 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
5816 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
5817 | |
5818 ** browse-url changes | |
5819 | |
5820 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
5821 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
5822 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
5823 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
5824 customization variables. | |
5825 | |
5826 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
5827 | |
5828 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
5829 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
5830 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
5831 | |
5832 ** Changes in Ediff | |
5833 | |
5834 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
5835 pops up the Info file for this command. | |
5836 | |
5837 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
5838 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
5839 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
5840 directories). | |
5841 | |
5842 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
5843 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
5844 files in the same directory. | |
5845 | |
5846 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
5847 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
5848 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
5849 | |
5850 ** Changes in Viper | |
5851 | |
5852 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
26264 | 5853 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
25853 | 5854 instead of vip-. |
5855 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
26264 | 5856 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
25853 | 5857 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
5858 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
5859 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
5860 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
5861 color when Viper is in insert state. | |
5862 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
5863 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
5864 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
5865 | |
5866 ** Etags changes. | |
5867 | |
5868 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
5869 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
5870 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
5871 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
5872 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
5873 | |
5874 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
5875 | |
5876 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
5877 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
5878 | |
5879 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
5880 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
5881 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
5882 | |
5883 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
5884 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
5885 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
5886 methods and protocols. | |
5887 | |
5888 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
5889 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
5890 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
5891 paragraph name. | |
5892 | |
5893 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
5894 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
5895 at least M times and as many as N times. | |
5896 | |
5897 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
5898 in files has changed slightly. | |
5899 | |
5900 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
5901 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
5902 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
5903 with old time-stamp-format values. | |
5904 | |
5905 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
5906 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
5907 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
5908 reasons. | |
5909 | |
5910 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
5911 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
5912 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
5913 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
5914 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
5915 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
5916 | |
5917 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
5918 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
5919 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
5920 | |
5921 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
5922 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
5923 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
5924 recommended now will continue to work then. | |
5925 | |
5926 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
5927 details. | |
5928 | |
5929 ** There are some additional major modes: | |
5930 | |
5931 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
5932 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
5933 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
5934 | |
5935 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
5936 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
5937 into Emacs. | |
5938 | |
5939 ** New Lisp packages include: | |
5940 | |
5941 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
5942 | |
5943 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
5944 be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
5945 | |
5946 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
5947 | |
5948 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
5949 in shell buffers. | |
5950 | |
5951 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
5952 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
5953 and `elint-defun'. | |
5954 | |
5955 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
5956 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
5957 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
5958 strings or comments. | |
5959 | |
5960 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
5961 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
5962 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
5963 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
5964 at these points. | |
5965 | |
5966 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
5967 can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
5968 | |
5969 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
5970 Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
5971 | |
5972 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
5973 | |
5974 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
5975 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
5976 | |
5977 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
5978 | |
5979 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
5980 | |
5981 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
5982 | |
5983 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
5984 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
5985 | |
5986 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
5987 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
5988 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
5989 original place after inserting the copy. | |
5990 | |
5991 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
5992 on the buffer. | |
5993 | |
5994 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
5995 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
5996 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
5997 | |
5998 Enable mouse-drag with: | |
5999 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
6000 -or- | |
6001 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
6002 | |
6003 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
6004 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
6005 | |
6006 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
6007 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
6008 | |
6009 *** ogonek | |
6010 | |
6011 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
6012 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
6013 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
6014 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
6015 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
6016 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
6017 instance) and vice versa. | |
6018 | |
6019 To use this package load it using | |
6020 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
6021 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
26264 | 6022 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
25853 | 6023 M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
6024 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
6025 ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
6026 | |
6027 *** Interface to ph. | |
6028 | |
6029 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
6030 | |
6031 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
6032 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
6033 these servers. | |
6034 | |
6035 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
6036 | |
6037 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
6038 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
6039 while the real cursor does not move. | |
6040 | |
6041 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
6042 for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
6043 | |
6044 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
6045 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
6046 | |
6047 ** movemail change | |
6048 | |
6049 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
6050 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
6051 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
6052 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
6053 | |
6054 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
6055 | |
6056 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
6057 | |
6058 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
6059 | |
6060 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
6061 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
6062 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
6063 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
6064 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
6065 | |
6066 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
6067 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
6068 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
6069 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
6070 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
6071 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
6072 | |
6073 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
6074 | |
6075 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
6076 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
6077 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
6078 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
6079 | |
6080 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
6081 to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
6082 | |
6083 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
6084 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
6085 "win". | |
6086 | |
6087 ** Basic Lisp changes | |
6088 | |
6089 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
6090 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
6091 | |
6092 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
6093 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
6094 or by the user. | |
6095 | |
6096 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
6097 | |
6098 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
6099 | |
6100 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
6101 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
6102 | |
6103 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
6104 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
6105 its argument. | |
6106 | |
6107 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
6108 | |
6109 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
6110 | |
6111 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
6112 | |
6113 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
6114 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
6115 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
6116 `format' function. | |
6117 | |
6118 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
6119 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
6120 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
6121 | |
6122 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
6123 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
6124 adding one of these suffixes. | |
6125 | |
6126 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
6127 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
26264 | 6128 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
25853 | 6129 |
6130 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
6131 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
6132 | |
6133 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
6134 | |
6135 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
6136 You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
6137 | |
6138 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
6139 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
6140 | |
6141 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
6142 | |
6143 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
6144 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
6145 | |
6146 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
6147 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
6148 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
6149 works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
6150 | |
6151 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
6152 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
6153 of the last form. | |
6154 | |
6155 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
6156 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
6157 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
6158 as the last form. | |
6159 | |
6160 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
6161 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
6162 matches. | |
6163 | |
6164 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
6165 | |
6166 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
6167 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
6168 Then it returns that string. | |
6169 | |
6170 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
6171 | |
6172 (with-output-to-string | |
6173 (princ "The buffer is ") | |
6174 (princ (buffer-name))) | |
6175 | |
6176 returns "The buffer is foo". | |
6177 | |
6178 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
6179 is non-nil. | |
6180 | |
6181 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
6182 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
6183 characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
6184 | |
6185 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
6186 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
6187 | |
6188 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
6189 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
6190 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
6191 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
6192 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
6193 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
6194 | |
6195 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
6196 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
6197 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
6198 characters". | |
6199 | |
6200 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
6201 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
6202 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
6203 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
6204 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
6205 | |
6206 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
6207 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
6208 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
6209 character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
6210 | |
6211 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
6212 always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
6213 | |
6214 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
26264 | 6215 |
25853 | 6216 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
6217 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
6218 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
6219 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
6220 guaranteed. | |
6221 | |
6222 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
6223 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
6224 character). | |
6225 | |
6226 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
6227 | |
6228 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
6229 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
6230 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
6231 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
6232 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
6233 | |
6234 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
6235 | |
6236 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
6237 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
6238 more than the number of characters. | |
6239 | |
6240 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
6241 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
6242 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
6243 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
6244 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
6245 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
6246 | |
6247 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
6248 and returns a string containing those characters. | |
6249 | |
6250 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
6251 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
6252 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
6253 character, sref signals an error. | |
6254 | |
6255 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
6256 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
6257 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
6258 | |
6259 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
6260 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
6261 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
6262 | |
6263 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
6264 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
6265 to a vector of the characters in it. | |
6266 | |
6267 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
6268 of a string. You call it as follows: | |
6269 | |
6270 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
6271 | |
6272 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
6273 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
6274 This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
6275 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
6276 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
6277 | |
6278 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
6279 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
6280 | |
6281 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
6282 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
6283 | |
6284 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
6285 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
6286 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
6287 which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
6288 | |
6289 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
6290 | |
6291 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
6292 | |
6293 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
6294 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
6295 are not included in the resulting value. | |
6296 | |
6297 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
6298 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
6299 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
6300 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
6301 | |
6302 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
6303 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
6304 character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
6305 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
6306 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
6307 column START-COLUMN. | |
6308 | |
6309 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
6310 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
6311 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
6312 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
6313 changed text, before the change. | |
6314 | |
6315 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
6316 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
6317 one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
6318 | |
6319 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
6320 | |
6321 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
6322 | |
6323 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
6324 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
6325 | |
6326 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
6327 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
6328 which identify the character within that character set. | |
6329 | |
6330 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
6331 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
6332 opposite of split-char. | |
6333 | |
6334 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
6335 of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
6336 | |
6337 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
6338 of all the characters in a string. | |
6339 | |
6340 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
6341 and specifying coding systems. | |
6342 | |
6343 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
6344 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
6345 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
6346 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
6347 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
6348 as what to do about code conversion.) | |
6349 | |
6350 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
6351 name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
6352 | |
6353 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
6354 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
6355 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
6356 | |
6357 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
6358 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
6359 to match against a file name. | |
6360 | |
6361 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
6362 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
6363 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
6364 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
6365 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
6366 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
6367 | |
6368 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
6369 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
6370 | |
6371 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
6372 the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
6373 | |
6374 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
6375 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
6376 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
6377 service names. | |
6378 | |
6379 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
6380 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
6381 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
6382 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
6383 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
6384 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
6385 | |
6386 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
6387 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
6388 | |
6389 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
6390 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
6391 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
6392 start the subprocess. | |
6393 | |
6394 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
6395 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
6396 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
6397 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
6398 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
6399 | |
6400 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
6401 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
6402 subprocess. | |
6403 | |
6404 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
6405 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
6406 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
6407 connection permanently or until overridden. | |
6408 | |
6409 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
6410 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
6411 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
6412 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
6413 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
6414 system for one operation at a time. | |
6415 | |
6416 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
6417 files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
6418 | |
6419 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
6420 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
6421 The value is a cons cell, | |
6422 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
6423 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
6424 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
6425 input to the subprocess. | |
6426 | |
6427 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
6428 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
6429 | |
6430 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
6431 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
6432 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
6433 | |
6434 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
6435 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
6436 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
6437 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
6438 customization. | |
6439 | |
6440 Thus, instead of writing | |
6441 | |
6442 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
6443 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
6444 | |
6445 you would now write this: | |
6446 | |
6447 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
6448 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
6449 :type 'boolean | |
6450 :group foo) | |
6451 | |
6452 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
6453 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
6454 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
6455 for a description of them. | |
6456 | |
6457 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
6458 should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
6459 | |
6460 (defgroup ispell nil | |
6461 "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
6462 :group 'processes) | |
6463 | |
6464 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
6465 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
6466 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
6467 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
6468 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
6469 | |
6470 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
6471 package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
6472 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
6473 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
6474 first-level subgroups. | |
6475 | |
6476 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
6477 | |
6478 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
6479 separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
6480 | |
6481 ** easy-mmode | |
6482 | |
6483 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
6484 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
6485 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
6486 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
6487 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
6488 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
6489 | |
6490 ** Text property changes | |
6491 | |
6492 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
6493 text property. | |
6494 | |
6495 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
6496 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
6497 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
6498 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
6499 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
6500 | |
6501 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
6502 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
6503 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
6504 position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
6505 | |
6506 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
6507 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
6508 is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
6509 | |
6510 ** Changes in invisibility features | |
6511 | |
6512 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
6513 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
6514 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
6515 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
6516 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
6517 make the overlay visible. | |
6518 | |
6519 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
6520 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
6521 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
6522 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
6523 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
6524 t when it should hide it. | |
6525 | |
6526 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
6527 | |
6528 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
26264 | 6529 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
6530 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
25853 | 6531 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
26264 | 6532 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
25853 | 6533 Here is an example of how to do this: |
6534 | |
6535 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
26264 | 6536 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
25853 | 6537 ;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
26264 | 6538 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
25853 | 6539 |
6540 ... | |
6541 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
6542 | |
6543 ... | |
6544 ;; When done with the overlays: | |
6545 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
6546 ;; Or respectively: | |
6547 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
6548 | |
6549 ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
6550 | |
6551 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
6552 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
6553 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
6554 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
6555 | |
6556 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
6557 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
6558 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
6559 | |
6560 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
6561 character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
6562 | |
6563 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
6564 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
6565 | |
6566 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
6567 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
6568 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
6569 | |
6570 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
6571 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
6572 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
6573 determine the syntax type of the character. | |
6574 | |
6575 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
6576 of the current buffer. | |
6577 | |
6578 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
6579 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
6580 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
6581 | |
6582 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
6583 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
6584 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
6585 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
6586 another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
6587 | |
6588 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
6589 text property. | |
6590 | |
6591 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
6592 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
6593 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
6594 | |
6595 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
6596 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
6597 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
6598 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
6599 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
6600 | |
6601 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
6602 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
6603 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
6604 | |
6605 ** Changes in face features | |
6606 | |
6607 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
6608 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
6609 | |
6610 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
6611 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
6612 | |
6613 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
6614 set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
6615 | |
6616 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
6617 set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
6618 | |
6619 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
6620 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
6621 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
6622 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
6623 overlay property). | |
6624 | |
6625 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
6626 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
6627 | |
6628 ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
6629 | |
6630 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
6631 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
6632 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
6633 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
6634 | |
6635 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
6636 begins with ~. | |
6637 | |
6638 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
6639 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
6640 | |
6641 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
6642 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
6643 | |
6644 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
6645 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
6646 | |
6647 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
6648 character code conversion as well as other things. | |
6649 | |
6650 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
6651 (formerly it did not). | |
6652 | |
6653 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
6654 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
6655 | |
6656 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
6657 instead of constant strings. | |
6658 | |
6659 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
6660 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
6661 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
6662 | |
6663 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
6664 in the same way as before. | |
6665 | |
6666 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
6667 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
6668 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
6669 | |
6670 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
6671 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
6672 else, and returns nil. | |
6673 | |
6674 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
6675 directory cannot be listed. | |
6676 | |
6677 ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
6678 | |
6679 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
6680 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
6681 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
6682 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
6683 ways: | |
6684 | |
6685 It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
6686 It is available through the history command M-n. | |
6687 | |
6688 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
6689 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
6690 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
6691 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
6692 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
6693 | |
6694 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
6695 argument in this way. | |
6696 | |
6697 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
6698 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
6699 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
6700 | |
6701 ** Echo area features | |
6702 | |
6703 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
6704 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
6705 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
6706 after the echo area is cleared. | |
6707 | |
6708 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
6709 in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
6710 | |
6711 ** Keyboard input features | |
6712 | |
6713 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
6714 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
6715 | |
6716 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
6717 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
6718 by keyboard macros. | |
6719 | |
6720 ** Frame-related changes | |
6721 | |
6722 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
6723 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
6724 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
6725 | |
6726 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
6727 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
6728 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
6729 | |
6730 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
6731 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
6732 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
6733 in the selected frame. | |
6734 | |
6735 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
6736 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
6737 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
6738 | |
6739 ** X Windows features | |
6740 | |
6741 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
6742 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
6743 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
6744 | |
6745 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
6746 The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
6747 | |
6748 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
6749 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
6750 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
6751 | |
6752 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
6753 it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
6754 | |
6755 ** Subprocess features | |
6756 | |
6757 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
6758 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
6759 automatically. | |
6760 | |
6761 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
6762 and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
6763 | |
6764 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
6765 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
6766 | |
6767 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
6768 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
6769 | |
6770 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
6771 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
6772 goes after the other menu items. | |
6773 | |
6774 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
26264 | 6775 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
25853 | 6776 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
6777 are in use. | |
6778 | |
6779 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
6780 series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
6781 | |
6782 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
6783 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
6784 form. | |
6785 | |
6786 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
6787 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
6788 but its hook is still run. | |
6789 | |
6790 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
6791 for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
6792 | |
6793 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
6794 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
6795 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
6796 | |
6797 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
6798 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
6799 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
6800 warned. | |
6801 | |
6802 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
6803 way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
6804 | |
6805 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
6806 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
6807 functions like display-time. | |
6808 | |
6809 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
6810 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
6811 | |
6812 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
6813 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
6814 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
6815 | |
6816 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
6817 if there is an error in compilation. | |
6818 | |
6819 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
6820 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
6821 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
6822 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
6823 | |
6824 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
6825 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
6826 the *scratch* buffer. | |
6827 | |
6828 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
6829 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
6830 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
6831 e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
6832 | |
6833 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
6834 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
6835 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
6836 | |
6837 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
6838 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
6839 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
6840 and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
6841 | |
6842 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
6843 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
6844 full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
6845 | |
6846 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
6847 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
6848 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
6849 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
6850 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
6851 files at all. | |
6852 | |
6853 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
6854 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
6855 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
6856 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
6857 | |
6858 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
6859 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
6860 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
6861 is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
6862 | |
6863 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
6864 | |
6865 ** imenu.el changes. | |
6866 | |
6867 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
26264 | 6868 item from menu created by imenu. |
25853 | 6869 |
6870 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
6871 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
6872 select one of those items. | |
6873 | |
6874 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
6875 | |
6876 * Changes in Emacs 19.33. | |
6877 | |
6878 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major | |
6879 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) | |
6880 | |
6881 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to | |
6882 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. | |
6883 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. | |
6884 | |
6885 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
6886 | |
6887 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. | |
6888 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. | |
6889 | |
6890 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
6891 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it | |
6892 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the | |
6893 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional | |
6894 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is | |
6895 all caps. | |
6896 | |
6897 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame | |
6898 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. | |
6899 | |
6900 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 | |
6901 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same | |
6902 as in previous Emacs versions. | |
6903 | |
6904 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a | |
6905 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any | |
6906 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple | |
6907 frames. | |
6908 | |
6909 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value | |
6910 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. | |
6911 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the | |
6912 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by | |
6913 accident. | |
6914 | |
6915 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined | |
6916 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. | |
6917 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that | |
6918 line and then executing the macro. | |
6919 | |
6920 This command is not new, but was never documented before. | |
6921 | |
6922 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant | |
6923 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter | |
6924 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting | |
6925 characters. | |
6926 | |
6927 ** Font Lock mode | |
6928 | |
6929 *** Font Lock support modes | |
6930 | |
6931 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see | |
6932 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the | |
6933 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode | |
6934 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when | |
6935 Font Lock mode is enabled. | |
6936 | |
6937 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: | |
6938 | |
6939 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) | |
6940 | |
6941 in your ~/.emacs. | |
6942 | |
6943 *** lazy-lock | |
6944 | |
6945 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur | |
6946 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer | |
6947 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and | |
6948 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events | |
6949 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the | |
6950 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until | |
6951 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. | |
6952 | |
6953 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: | |
6954 | |
6955 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | |
6956 | |
6957 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. | |
6958 | |
6959 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
6960 | |
6961 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or | |
6962 paren and key. | |
6963 | |
6964 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now | |
6965 supported. | |
6966 | |
6967 ** Gnus changes. | |
6968 | |
6969 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new | |
6970 commands and variables have been added. There should be no | |
6971 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the | |
6972 previously released version, except in the message composition area. | |
6973 | |
6974 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes | |
6975 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. | |
6976 | |
26264 | 6977 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization |
25853 | 6978 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now |
6979 obsolete. | |
6980 | |
6981 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where | |
6982 missing articles are represented by empty nodes. | |
6983 | |
6984 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) | |
6985 | |
6986 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. | |
6987 | |
6988 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) | |
6989 | |
6990 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are | |
26264 | 6991 referred. |
25853 | 6992 |
6993 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: | |
6994 | |
6995 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) | |
6996 | |
6997 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. | |
6998 | |
6999 (setq gnus-use-trees t) | |
7000 | |
7001 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary | |
26264 | 7002 buffers. |
25853 | 7003 |
7004 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) | |
7005 | |
7006 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: | |
7007 | |
7008 `M-x gnus-binary-mode' | |
7009 | |
7010 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. | |
7011 | |
7012 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) | |
7013 | |
7014 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. | |
7015 | |
7016 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. | |
7017 | |
7018 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency | |
7019 is possible. | |
7020 | |
7021 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) | |
7022 | |
7023 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on | |
7024 groups of groups. | |
7025 | |
7026 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. | |
7027 | |
7028 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news | |
26264 | 7029 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. |
25853 | 7030 |
7031 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. | |
7032 | |
7033 *** The Gnus cache is much faster. | |
7034 | |
7035 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. | |
7036 | |
7037 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) | |
7038 | |
7039 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and | |
7040 expiration times. | |
7041 | |
7042 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. | |
7043 | |
7044 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on | |
7045 process marked articles on the `M P' submap. | |
7046 | |
7047 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available | |
7048 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been | |
7049 bound to keys on the `/' submap. | |
7050 | |
7051 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving | |
7052 articles with the `*' command. | |
7053 | |
7054 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. | |
7055 | |
7056 *** Article headers can be buttonized. | |
7057 | |
7058 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) | |
7059 | |
7060 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. | |
7061 | |
26264 | 7062 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the |
25853 | 7063 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. |
7064 | |
7065 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article | |
26264 | 7066 buffer. |
25853 | 7067 |
7068 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. | |
7069 | |
7070 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. | |
7071 | |
7072 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. | |
7073 | |
7074 (setq gnus-use-nocem t) | |
7075 | |
26264 | 7076 *** Groups can be made permanently visible. |
25853 | 7077 |
7078 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") | |
7079 | |
26264 | 7080 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. |
25853 | 7081 |
7082 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. | |
7083 | |
26264 | 7084 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. |
7085 | |
7086 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function | |
25853 | 7087 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) |
7088 | |
7089 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid | |
26264 | 7090 refetching. |
25853 | 7091 |
7092 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) | |
7093 | |
7094 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate | |
7095 buffer to allow easier treatment. | |
7096 | |
7097 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. | |
7098 | |
7099 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. | |
7100 | |
7101 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) | |
7102 | |
7103 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching | |
26264 | 7104 articles. |
25853 | 7105 |
7106 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) | |
7107 | |
26264 | 7108 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. |
25853 | 7109 |
7110 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much | |
7111 cited text to hide is now customizable. | |
7112 | |
7113 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) | |
7114 | |
7115 *** Boring headers can be hidden. | |
7116 | |
7117 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) | |
7118 | |
7119 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. | |
7120 | |
7121 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. | |
7122 | |
7123 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features | |
7124 in greater detail. | |
7125 | |
7126 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
7127 | |
7128 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional | |
7129 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not | |
7130 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already | |
7131 exists. | |
7132 | |
7133 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, | |
7134 as well as lists. | |
7135 | |
7136 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap | |
7137 of a given keymap. | |
7138 | |
7139 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a | |
7140 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a | |
7141 keymap or nil. | |
7142 | |
7143 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really | |
7144 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" | |
7145 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil | |
7146 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for | |
7147 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the | |
7148 alias. | |
7149 | |
7150 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 | |
7151 | |
7152 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. | |
7153 | |
7154 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. | |
7155 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law | |
7156 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans | |
7157 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any | |
7158 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. | |
7159 | |
7160 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what | |
7161 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site | |
7162 `http://www.vtw.org/'. | |
7163 | |
7164 ** A note about C mode indentation customization. | |
7165 | |
7166 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style | |
7167 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. | |
7168 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are | |
7169 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs | |
7170 chapter of the manual for details. | |
7171 | |
7172 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old | |
7173 customization variables take effect. | |
7174 | |
7175 ** Marking with the mouse. | |
7176 | |
7177 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains | |
7178 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are | |
7179 using M-x transient-mark-mode. | |
7180 | |
7181 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. | |
7182 | |
7183 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. | |
7184 | |
7185 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used | |
7186 to work on NT only and not on 95.) | |
7187 | |
7188 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems | |
7189 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as | |
7190 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS | |
7191 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS | |
7192 applications, these problems are significant. | |
7193 | |
7194 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is | |
7195 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. | |
7196 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess | |
7197 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any | |
7198 other DOS application as a subprocess. | |
7199 | |
7200 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. | |
7201 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. | |
7202 | |
7203 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate | |
7204 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably | |
7205 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. | |
7206 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two | |
7207 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing | |
7208 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. | |
7209 | |
7210 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. | |
7211 | |
7212 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in | |
7213 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the | |
7214 minibuffer contains. | |
7215 | |
7216 ** `title' frame parameter and resource. | |
7217 | |
7218 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. | |
7219 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. | |
7220 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise | |
7221 affects just the displayed title of the frame. | |
7222 | |
7223 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: | |
7224 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, | |
7225 and also serves as the default for the displayed title | |
7226 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. | |
7227 | |
7228 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new | |
7229 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). | |
7230 | |
7231 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the | |
7232 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual | |
7233 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. | |
7234 | |
7235 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif | |
7236 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add | |
7237 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds | |
7238 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: | |
7239 | |
7240 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 | |
7241 | |
7242 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases | |
7243 to replace the characters it "deletes". | |
7244 | |
7245 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. | |
7246 | |
7247 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts | |
7248 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, | |
7249 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. | |
7250 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message | |
7251 immediately after the selected one. | |
7252 | |
7253 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly | |
7254 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. | |
7255 | |
7256 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. | |
7257 | |
7258 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home | |
7259 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. | |
7260 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If | |
7261 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x | |
7262 recover-session. | |
7263 | |
7264 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting | |
7265 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session | |
7266 will not work. | |
7267 | |
7268 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on | |
7269 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off | |
7270 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this | |
7271 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so | |
7272 now that the bug is fixed. | |
7273 | |
7274 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
7275 | |
7276 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do | |
7277 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. | |
7278 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, | |
7279 which is dangerous and probably not what you want. | |
7280 | |
7281 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, | |
7282 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), | |
7283 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, | |
7284 the link is visited and a warning displayed. | |
7285 | |
7286 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. | |
7287 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which | |
7288 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). | |
7289 | |
7290 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and | |
7291 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they | |
7292 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. | |
7293 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, | |
7294 remain normal. | |
7295 | |
7296 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various | |
7297 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). | |
7298 | |
7299 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups | |
7300 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header | |
7301 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since | |
7302 Followup-To usually just holds one of those. | |
7303 | |
7304 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list | |
7305 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides | |
7306 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user | |
7307 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the | |
7308 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and | |
7309 `mail-directory-stream'.) | |
7310 | |
7311 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) | |
7312 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named | |
7313 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible | |
7314 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. | |
7315 | |
7316 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and | |
7317 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be | |
7318 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). | |
7319 | |
7320 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or | |
7321 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for | |
7322 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / | |
7323 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. | |
7324 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to | |
7325 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due | |
7326 to a limitation in font-lock). | |
7327 | |
7328 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. | |
7329 | |
7330 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current | |
7331 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all | |
7332 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in | |
7333 this example: | |
7334 | |
7335 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook | |
7336 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) | |
7337 | |
7338 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
7339 | |
7340 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. | |
7341 | |
7342 *** Font Lock mode is now supported. | |
7343 | |
7344 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. | |
7345 | |
7346 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new | |
7347 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting | |
7348 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or | |
7349 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c | |
7350 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. | |
7351 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. | |
7352 | |
7353 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q | |
7354 does the same job. | |
7355 | |
7356 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = | |
7357 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. | |
7358 | |
7359 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help | |
7360 text. | |
7361 | |
7362 ** Font Lock mode | |
7363 | |
7364 *** Global Font Lock mode | |
7365 | |
7366 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the | |
7367 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable | |
7368 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically | |
7369 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned | |
7370 on globally where the buffer mode supports it. | |
7371 | |
7372 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: | |
7373 | |
7374 (global-font-lock-mode t) | |
7375 | |
7376 in your ~/.emacs. | |
7377 | |
7378 *** Local Refontification | |
7379 | |
7380 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. | |
7381 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, | |
7382 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new | |
7383 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). | |
7384 | |
7385 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. | |
7386 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the | |
7387 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines | |
7388 above and below point. | |
7389 | |
7390 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. | |
7391 | |
7392 ** Follow mode | |
7393 | |
7394 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same | |
7395 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two | |
7396 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if | |
7397 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, | |
7398 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x | |
7399 follow-mode. | |
7400 | |
7401 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. | |
7402 | |
7403 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the | |
7404 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. | |
7405 | |
7406 ** hide-show changes. | |
7407 | |
7408 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed | |
7409 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for | |
7410 normal hooks. | |
7411 | |
7412 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. | |
7413 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. | |
7414 | |
7415 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are | |
7416 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are | |
7417 those that begin a function, record, or macro. | |
7418 | |
7419 ** MSDOS Changes | |
7420 | |
7421 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. | |
7422 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. | |
7423 | |
7424 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten | |
7425 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. | |
7426 | |
7427 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. | |
7428 | |
7429 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously | |
7430 pressing both mouse buttons. | |
7431 | |
7432 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had | |
7433 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones | |
26264 | 7434 are: |
25853 | 7435 |
7436 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) | |
7437 now works. | |
7438 | |
7439 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). | |
7440 | |
7441 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new | |
7442 implementation of Emacs timers, see below). | |
7443 | |
7444 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. | |
7445 | |
7446 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. | |
7447 | |
7448 **** `M-x recover-session' works. | |
7449 | |
7450 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. | |
7451 | |
7452 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. | |
7453 | |
7454 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. | |
7455 | |
7456 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 | |
7457 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a | |
7458 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in | |
7459 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this | |
7460 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. | |
7461 | |
7462 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. | |
7463 | |
7464 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', | |
7465 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' | |
7466 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also | |
7467 be different. | |
7468 | |
7469 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather | |
7470 than `system-type'. | |
7471 | |
7472 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. | |
7473 | |
7474 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process | |
7475 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. | |
7476 | |
7477 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers | |
7478 that pointed into or next to the deleted text. | |
7479 | |
7480 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and | |
7481 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more | |
7482 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. | |
7483 | |
7484 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer | |
7485 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks | |
7486 like this: | |
7487 | |
7488 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
7489 | |
7490 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. | |
7491 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer | |
7492 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. | |
7493 | |
7494 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in | |
7495 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 | |
7496 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. | |
7497 | |
7498 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give | |
7499 up if too much time passes. | |
7500 | |
7501 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) | |
7502 | |
7503 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. | |
7504 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value | |
7505 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last | |
7506 form in BODY. | |
7507 | |
7508 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for | |
7509 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A | |
7510 call looks like this: | |
7511 | |
7512 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
7513 | |
7514 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer | |
7515 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the | |
7516 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments | |
7517 ARGS. | |
7518 | |
7519 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse | |
7520 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse | |
7521 command. | |
7522 | |
7523 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each | |
7524 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer | |
7525 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after | |
7526 each time Emacs becomes idle. | |
7527 | |
7528 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is | |
7529 idle for SECS seconds. | |
7530 | |
7531 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at | |
7532 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your | |
7533 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers | |
7534 instead. | |
7535 | |
7536 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if | |
7537 there is no answer within a certain time. | |
7538 | |
7539 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) | |
7540 | |
7541 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers | |
7542 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. | |
7543 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. | |
7544 | |
7545 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven | |
7546 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual | |
7547 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the | |
7548 arguments in between are ignored. | |
7549 | |
7550 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as | |
7551 the list of arguments for `encode-time'. | |
7552 | |
7553 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory | |
7554 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to | |
7555 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for | |
7556 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs | |
7557 version. | |
7558 | |
7559 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs | |
7560 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating | |
7561 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that | |
7562 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself | |
7563 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the | |
7564 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. | |
7565 | |
7566 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or | |
7567 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating | |
7568 systems with limited file name syntax. | |
7569 | |
7570 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function | |
7571 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form | |
7572 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file | |
7573 completions.el: | |
7574 | |
7575 (defvar save-completions-file-name | |
7576 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") | |
7577 "*The filename to save completions to.") | |
7578 | |
7579 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that | |
7580 depends on the operating system, because the definition of | |
7581 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On | |
7582 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On | |
7583 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. | |
7584 | |
7585 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument | |
7586 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the | |
7587 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) | |
7588 | |
7589 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process | |
7590 marker from its buffer position. | |
7591 | |
7592 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether | |
7593 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. | |
7594 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. | |
7595 | |
7596 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors | |
7597 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error | |
7598 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any | |
7599 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions | |
7600 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, | |
7601 regardless of the value of debug-on-error. | |
7602 | |
7603 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting | |
7604 errors that happen often during editing. | |
7605 | |
7606 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum | |
7607 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case | |
7608 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. | |
7609 | |
7610 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window | |
7611 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. | |
7612 | |
7613 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying | |
7614 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer | |
7615 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames | |
7616 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., | |
7617 and not get-buffer-window. | |
7618 | |
7619 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, | |
7620 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer | |
7621 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. | |
7622 | |
7623 If you use this feature, you should set the variable | |
7624 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a | |
7625 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a | |
7626 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions | |
7627 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil | |
7628 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called | |
7629 over and over for the same text. | |
7630 | |
7631 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el | |
7632 | |
7633 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written | |
7634 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: | |
7635 | |
7636 ;; @(#) HEADER: text | |
7637 ;; $HEADER: text $ | |
7638 | |
7639 in addition to the normal | |
7640 | |
7641 ;; HEADER: text | |
7642 | |
7643 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify | |
7644 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and | |
7645 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. | |
7646 | |
7647 * For older news, see the file ONEWS. | |
7648 | |
7649 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
7650 Copyright information: | |
7651 | |
27200 | 7652 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25853 | 7653 |
7654 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
7655 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
7656 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
7657 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
7658 | |
7659 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
7660 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
7661 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
7662 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
7663 | |
7664 Local variables: | |
7665 mode: outline | |
7666 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
7667 end: |